Skip to main content

Full text of "Catalogue number [of the Bulletin]"

See other formats


WELLESLEY   COLLEGE 
CALENDAR 


1909-1910 


WELLESLEY   COLLEGE 
CALENDAR 


1909-1910 


PRESS     OF    FRANK    WOOD,     BOSTON 


CORRESPONDEN  CE 


All  inquiries  regarding  admission  (including  admission  to  grad- 
uate courses)  should  be  addressed  to  Miss  Ellen  F.  Pendleton, 
Dean  of  the  College. 

Applications  for  general  information  should  be  addressed  to  Miss 
Mary  Caswell.  As  Secretary  of  the  Teachers'  Registry,  Miss 
Caswell  is  also  prepared  to  furnish  full  and  confidential  informa- 
tion in  regard  to  the  qualifications,  character,  and  experience  of 
teachers  educated  at  Wellesley.  Former  students  of  the  College 
who  wish  situations  as  teachers  have  the  aid  of  the  Teachers' 
Registry. 

Applications  for  pecuniary  assistance  (see  p.  150)  should  be  made 
by  letter  addressed  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Students'  Aid  Society, 
Wellesley,  Mass. 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS 


Correspondence 

i 

Calendar     .... 

5 

Board  of  Trustees 

6 

Standing  Committees 

7 

Officers  of  Instruction  anl 

Government 

9 

Standing  Committees 

21 

Foundation  and  Purpose 

^3 

Admission    .... 

25 

By  Examination 

41 

By  Certificate      . 

44 

Definition  of  Requirements 

27 

To  Advanced  Standing    . 

46 

Of  Students  not  Candidates  fo 

a  Degree 

47 

Courses  of  Instruction:— 

Art 

4S 

Astronomy 

52 

Biblical  History 

54 

Botany         .... 

57 

Chemistry  .... 

60 

Economics 

62 

Education  .... 

6S 

Elocution    .... 

70 

English  Literature    . 

71 

English  Composition 

7S 

English  Language    . 

So 

French         .... 

Si 

Geology  and  Geography  . 

S6 

German        .... 

S8 

Greek 

95 

History        .... 

9S 

Hygiene  and  Physical  Educa 

tion 

103 

Italian          .... 

109 

Latin 

III 

Classical  Archa;ology 

114 

Applied  Mathematics 

"5 

Pure  Mathematics     . 

116 

Music           .... 

119 

Comparative  Philology     . 

125 

Philosophy  and  Psychology 

126 

Physics        .... 

131 

Spanish        .... 

133 

Zoology       .... 

134 

Examinations  (College)   . 

137 

Degrees:— 

Requirements  for  B.A.  Degree        137 

Requirements  for  M.A.  Degree        139 

Expenses      .... 

141 

Residence    .... 

,      143 

Health         .... 

144 

Fellowships    and    Scholar 

ships         .... 

144 

For  Graduates    . 

144 

For  Undergraduates 

147 

Libraries     .... 

151 

Gymnasium 

152 

Art    Building   and    Collec 

TIONS         .... 

152 

Music  Equipment     , 

153 

Laboratories  and  Scientific 

Collections 

153 

Needs  of  College    . 

157 

Forms  of  Bequest   . 

.       158 

Degrees  Conferred  in  1909 

159 

Honor  Scholarships 

162 

Summary  of  Students    . 

163 

Officers  of  Alumn.e  Asso- 

ciation .... 

164 

Index     

16S 

1909 

1910 

1911 

JULY 

JANUARY 

JULY 

JANUARY 

S 

M 

1 

w 

1 
1 

2 

3 

s 

M 

1 

wi 

£ 

S 

1 

s 

M 

T 

w 

T 

f 

1 

s 

•2 

1 

M 

? 

I 

3 

¥ 

4 

T 
5 

T 

6 

7 

4 

5 

6 

V 

8 

9 

10 

2 

3 

4 

5    6 

7 

P 

a 

4 

5 

6 

7 

f= 

9 

8 

9 

10 

11 

1? 

13 

14 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

9 

10 

11 

12  1.1 

14 

15 

10 

11 

12 

1.1 

14 

15 

16 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

'>0 

''1 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

16 

17 

lf= 

19  2(1 

21 

22 

17 

IF 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

?.'> 

23 

24 

''5 

?6 

?7 

'>8 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

23 

24 

25 

26  27 

28 

29 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

29 

30 

31 

•  • 

•• 

..!.. 

•  • 

•  • 

•  • 

30 

31 

.. 

..  .. 

.. 

31 

•  . 

.. 

.. 

.. 

.. 

.. 

.. 

.. 

.. 

AIGIST 

FEBRUARY 

AUGUST 

FEBRUARY       || 

TT 

3 

4 

5 

6 

I 

1 

2 

.1 

4 

-5 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

,. 

11  2 

^ 

4 

8    9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

1< 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

5 

6 

7 

8 

f 

10 

11 

15  16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

12 

1.1 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

22  23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

21 

22 

23 

24 

2b 

26 

21 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

29:30 

31 

27 

28 

.. 

28 

29 

30 

31 

.. 

•  • 

.' 

26127128 

SEPTEMBER 

MARCH 

SEPTEMBER 

MARCH           II 

1    2 

.1 

4 

1 

:> 

S 

4 

A 

.. 

..  .. 

1     2 

3 

..  ..    1    2 

3 

4 

5    6 

7 

8    9 

10 

11 

fi 

7 

R 

9 

10 

11 

12 

4 

5 

6l  7 

8    9 

10 

5 

6    7    81  9 

10 

11 

12  13 

14 

15  16 

17 

18 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

11 

12 

13  14 

I5ll6 

17 

12 

13  14  15116 

17 

18 

19  20 

21 

nn 

24 

25 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

18 

19 

2021 

22  23 

24 

19 

20  21  22I23 

24 

25 

26127 

28|29|30 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

25 

26 

2V|28 

29|30  .. 

26 

27  28  29|30 

31 

OCTOBER 

APRIL 

OCTOBER 

APRIL            1 

"T 

-? 

~T 

-? 

•  • 

•  • 

, . 

, . 

1 

., 

.. 

,. 

1 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

q 

2 

3 

4 

6 

6 

7 

8 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

10 

11 

1? 

13 

14 

15 

16 

y 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

Id 

y 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

17 

18 

19 

?0 

''1 

'}<> 

?? 

17 

18 

19 

?0 

?1 

?'' 

91 

lb 

a 

lb 

19 

20 

21 

22 

16  17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

24 

31 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

•• 

23 
30 

24 
11 

25 

26 

28 

29 

'X. 

!! 

■t 

27 

28 

29 

NOVEMBER 

MAY 

NOVEMBER 

MAY            II 

,, 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

"T 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

,, 

1|  2 

:i 

4 

5 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5    6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

6 

7 

81  9 

10 

11 

12 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

1213 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

15 

Ifi 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

13 

14 

15116 

17 

18 

19 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19  20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

2P. 

2021 

22  23 

24 

25 

26 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26  27 

28 

29 

30 

29 

30 

31 

27|28 

29  30 

28 

29 

30 

31 

.. 

..  .. 

DECEMBER       | 

JUNE            II 

DECEMBER 

JUNE 

*4 

5 

6 

7 

1 

8 

2 
9 

3 

10 

*4 

5 

6 

•;J 

2 
9 

3 

10 

,, 

,, 

1 

2 

;^ 

4 

1 

2 

^ 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

6    6    7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

11 

12 

13 

14  15 

16 

17 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

12  13  14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

18 

19 

20 

21  22 

23 

24 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23  24 

25! 

19  20  21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

25 

26 

28  29 

30 

[26_ 

27 

28 

2^ 

30|31 

..1 

26  27  28  29 

30 

— 

IL 

— 

^ 

nJ 

CALENDAR 


The  academic  year  consists  of  thirty-four  weeks  exclusive  of  vacations  and  ot 
the  week  devoted  to  entrance  examinations.  Commencement  Day  falls  on  the 
Tuesday  nearest  the  eighteenth  of  June.  The  academic  year  begins  on  the  four- 
teenth  Tuesday  after  Commencement. 

1909. 
Examinations       ....  September  28-October  i. 

College  dormitories  open    .         .    9  a.  m.  Friday,  October  i. 
Registration  closes       .         .  i  p.  m.  Saturday,  October  2. 

Academic  year  begins  .         .    Tuesday,  October  5. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.   Wednesday,  November  24,  until  12.30 

p.  M.  Friday,  November  26. 
Recess  from   12.30  p.  m.  Thursday,  December  16,  1909,  until 
I  p.  M.  Wednesday,  January  5,  1910. 

1910. 
Registration  closes   for   all    students  at  i  p.  m.  Wednesday,  Jan- 
uary 5. 
Second  Semester  begins       .         .         Monday,         February  21. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Wednesday,  March  23,  until  i  p.  m. 
Wednesday,  March  30. 
Registration  closes  for  all  students  at  i  p.  m.  Wednesday,  March  30. 
Commencement  .         .         .         Tuesday,        June  21. 

Alumnae  Day      ....         Wednesday,  June  22. 
Examinations       ....  September  20-23. 

College  dormitories  open    .         .    9  a.  m.  Friday,  September  23. 
Registration  closes       .         .  i  p.  :\i.  Saturday,  September  24. 

Academic  year  begins  .         .         Tuesday,        September  27. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Wednesday,  November  23,  until  12.30 

p.  M.  Friday,  November  25. 
Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Thursday,  December  15,   1910,  until 
I  p.  M.  Wednesday,  January  4  191 1. 

1911. 
Registration   closes  for  all    students  at  i  p.  m.  Wednesday,  Jan- 
uary 4. 
Second  Semester  begins      .         .         Monday,         February  13. 

Recess  from  12.30  p.  m.  Friday,  March  24,  until  i  p.  m.  Tues- 
day, April  4. 
Registration  closes  for  all  students  at  i  p.  m.  Tuesday,  April  4. 
Commencement  .         .         .         Tuesday,        June  20. 

Alumn.e  Day      ....         Wednesday,  June  21. 


BOARD  OF  TRUSTEES 


SAMUEL  BILLINGS  CAPEN,  ^lA.,  LL.D.   .      Jamaica  Plain. 
President  of  the  Board. 

WILLIAM  LAWRENCE,  D.D.,  LL.D.,  D.C.L., 

Bishop  of  Eastern  Mass. 
Vice  President. 


ALEXANDER  McKENZIE,  D.D.     . 

President  Emeritus. 

MRS.  HENRY  FOWLE  DURANT. 
Secretary. 

ALPHEUS  HOLMES  HARDY,  B.A.      . 
Treasurer. 


Catnbridge. 

Wellesley. 

Boston. 


B.A. 


A. 


WILLIAM  FAIRFIELD  WARREN 
LILIAN  HORSFORD  FARLOW 
EDWIN  HALE  ABBOT,  LL.B. 
LOUISE  McCOY  NORTH,  M.A. 
AD  ALINE  EMERSON  THOMPSON 
SARAH  ELIZABETH  WHITIN 
ANDREW  FISKE,  Ph.D. 
WILLIAM  HENRY  LINCOLN 
ROWLAND  GIBSON  HAZARD,  M 
JOSEPH  LINCOLN  COLBY,  LL.D 
CORNELIA  WARREN      . 
HERBERT  JOHNSON  WELLS 
GEORGE  EDWIN  HORR,  D.D. 
GEORGE  HOWE  DAVENPORT 
WILLIAM   EDWARDS    HUNTINGTON 


HELEN  JOSEPHINE  SANBORN,  B.A.   . 
ANNA  R.  BROWN  LINDSAY,  Ph.D.      . 
WILLIAM  BLODGET,  B.A.      . 
WILLIAM  VAIL  KELLEN,  Ph.D.,  LL.D. 
HELEN  BARRETT  MONTGOMERY,  B.A. 
CAROLINE  HAZARD,  M.A.,  Litt.D. 


S.T.D.,  LL.D.,     Brookline. 

Cambridge. 

Cambridge, 

Nevj  York,  N.   T. 

Rockford,  III. 

.    Whitinsville. 

.     Boston. 

Brookline. 

Peace  Dale,  R.  T. 

Nevjton  Centre. 

Waltham. 

Kingston,  R.  I. 

Newton  Centre. 

.    Boston. 

S.T.D.,  LL.D., 

Nevjton  Centre. 

Boston. 

.   Engleivood,  N.  J. 

Chestnut  Hill. 

Cohasset,  Mass. 

Rochester,  N.  T. 

LL.D.  {ex  officio) 

Wellesley  College. 


1909-10  Trustees 

EXECUTIVE  COMMITTEE 


SAMUEL  B.  CAPEN,  M.A.,  LL.D.,  Chairman. 

Mrs.  henry  F.  DURANT,  Secretary. 

WILLIAM  H.  LINCOLN. 

ANDREW  FISKE,  Ph.D. 

GEORGE  HOWE  DAVENPORT. 

LILIAN  HORSFORD  FARLOW. 

WILLIAM  V.  KELLEN,  Ph.D.,  LL.D. 

ALPHEUS  H.  HARDY,  B.A.  {e.x  officio) . 

CAROLINE  HAZARD,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D.  {ex  officio). 


FINANCE  COMMITTEE 


WILLIAM  BLODGET,  B.A. 
WILLIAM  H.  LINCOLN. 
ANDREW  FISKE,  Ph.D. 
SAMUEL  B.  CAPEN,  IVI.A.,  LL.D. 
ALPHEUS  H.  HARDY,  B.A.  {ex  officio). 


HONORARY   FEI^LiOW  IN  ASTRONOMY 


WILLIAMINA  PATON  FLEMING, 

Curator  of  Astrono?nical  Photographs,  Harvard  U?iix'ersity. 


OFFICERS    OF    INSTRUCTION    AND 
GOVERNMENT  ^ 


CAROLINE  HAZARD,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D., 
President. 

SUSAN  MARIA  HALLOWELL,  M.A., 
Professor  of  Botany,  Emeritus. 

SARAH  FRANCES  WHITING,  D.Sc, 

Professor  of  Physics  and  Director  of  Whitin  Observatory. 

MARY  ALICE  WILLCOX,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  Zoology. 

KATHARINE  COMAN,  Ph.B., 

Professor  of  Political  Economy  and  of  Political  and   Social 
Science. 

ANGIE  CLARA  CHAPIN,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Greek  Language  and  Literature. 

ELLEN  HAYES,  B.A., 

Professor  of  Astronomy  and  Applied  Mathematics. 

WILLIAM  HARMON  NILES,  B.S.,  Ph.B.,  M.A.,  LL.D., 
Professor  of  Geology,  Emeritus. 

KATHARINE  LEE  BATES,  M.A., 

Professor  of  English  Literature. 

CHARLOTTE  FITCH  ROBERTS,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  Chemistry. 

ALICE  VAN  VECHTEN  BROWN, 

Clara  Bertram  Kimball  Professor  of  Art. 

MARY  WHITON  CALKINS,  M.A.,  Litt.D., 
Professor  of  Philosophy  and  Psychology. 

ELLEN  LOUISA  BURRELL,  B.A., 
Professor  of  Pure  Mathematics. 

1  Arranged  according  to  rank  in  the  order  of  appointment. 


10  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

HAMILTON  CRAWFORD  MACDOUGALL,  Mus.D., 
Professor  of  Music. 

ELIZABETH  KIMBALL  KENDALL,  M.A.,  LL.B., 
Professor  of  History. 

2  ADELINE  BELLE  HAWES,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Latin  Language  and  Literature. 

MARGARETHE  MULLER, 

Professor  of  German  Language  and  Literature. 

2  SOPHIE  CHANTAL  HART,  M.A., 

Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

MARGARET  CLAY  FERGUSON,  Ph.D., 
Professor  of  Botany. 

HENRIETTE  LOUISE  THERE SE  COLIN,  Ph.D.,  Off.  I.  P., 
Professor  of  French  Language  and  Literature. 

ELIZA  HALL  KENDRICK,  Ph.D., 

Helen  Day  Gould  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 

ANNA  JANE  McKEAG,  Ph.D., 

Professor  of  the  History  and  Principles  of  Education. 

ELIZABETH  FLORETTE  FISHER,  B.S., 
Professor  of  Geology. 

AMY  MORRIS  HOMANS,M.A., 

Director  of  the  Department  of  Hygiene  and  Physical  Educa- 
tion. 

EVA  CHANDLER,  B.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

MARY  SOPHIA  CASE,  B.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Philosophy. 

VIDA  DUTTON  SCUDDER,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

3  ANNIE  SYBIL  MONTAGUE,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Greek. 

*  Absent  on  the  sabbatical  leave. 
8  Absent  on  leave. 


1909-10  Faculty  11 

KATHARINE  MAY  EDWARDS,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Greek  and  Comparative  Philology. 

*  SOPHIE  JEWETT, 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

CHARLOTTE  ALMIRA  BRAGG,  B.S., 
Associate  Professor  of  Chemistry. 

3 MARGARET  POLLOCK  SHERWOOD,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

ADELAIDE  IMOGENE  LOCKE,  B.A.,  S.T.B., 
Associate  Professor  of  Biblical  History. 

ELLEN  FITZ  PENDLETON,  M.A., 
Dean. 
Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

HELEN  ABBOT  MERRILL,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

MARIAN  ELIZABETH  HUBBARD,  B.S., 
Associate  Professor  of  Zoology. 

ALICE  WALTON,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Latin  and  Archaeology. 

ELEANOR  ACHESON  McCULLOCH  GAMBLE,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Psychology  and  Director  of  the  Psy- 
chological Laboratory. 

ALICE  VINTON  WAITE,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Language  and  Composition. 

EMILY  GREENE  BALCH,  B.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Economics  and  Sociology. 

MARGARET  HASTINGS  JACKSON, 

Associate  Professor  of  Italian  and  Curator  of  the  Frances 
Pearsons  Plimpton  Library  of  Italian  Literature. 

CLARENCE  GRANT  HAMILTON,  M.A., 
Associate  Professor  of  Music. 


*  Died  October  ii,  1909. 
3  Absent  on  leave. 


12  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

LAURA  EMMA  LOCKWOOD,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Language. 

4  MARTHA  HALE  SHACKFORD,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

CAROLINE  REBECCA  FLETCHER,  M.A., 
Associate  Professor  of  Latin. 

JULIA  SWIFT  ORVIS,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  History. 

NATALIE  WIPPLINGER,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  German. 

MALVINA  BENNETT,  B.S.,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Elocution. 

KARL  McKAY  WIEGAND,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  Botany. 

GRACE  EVANGELINE  DAVIS,  M.A., 
Associate  Professor  of  Physics. 

FRANCES  MELVILLE  PERRY,  M.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

ROXANA  HAYWARD  VIVIAN,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  Mathematics. 

CHARLES  LOWELL  YOUNG,  B.A., 

Associate  Professor  of  English  Literature. 

EDNA  VIRGINIA  MOFFETT,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  History. 

CAROLINE  BURLING  THOMPSON,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  Zoology. 

ALICE  ROBERTSON,  Ph.D., 

Associate  Professor  of  Zoology. 

LINCOLN  WARE  RIDDLE,  Ph.D., 
Associate  Professor  of  Botany. 

KATHARINE  PIATT  RAYMOND,  B.S.,  M.D., 
Instructor  in  Hj'giene. 

Absent  on  leave  for  the  first  semester. 


1909-10  Faculty  13 

8JOSEPHINE  MAY  BURNHAM,  Ph.B., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

HERMINE  CAROLINE  STUEVEN, 
Instructor  in  German. 

HENRY  SAXTON  ADAMS,  B.A.S., 

Instructor  in  Botany  and  Consulting  Landscape  Architect. 

EDITH  WINTHROP  MENDALL  TAYLOR,  B.A., 
Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

GEORGE  ARTHUR  GOODELL,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Chemistry. 

«  VALENTINE  JULIE  PUTHOD, 
Instructor  in  French. 

EDITH  ROSE  ABBOT, 
Instructor  in  Art. 

MARY  CAMPBELL  BLISS,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Botany. 

FLORENCE  EMILY  HASTINGS,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  German. 

3 CLARE  MACLLELEN  HOWARD,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

3 MABEL  MINERVA  YOUNG,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Mathematics. 

KATRINE  WHEELOCK,  B.D., 

Instructor  in  Biblical  History.  > 

ADELE  LATHROP,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  English  Literature. 

ELIZA  JACOBUS  NEWKIRK,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  History  of  Architecture. 

AGNES  FRANCES  PERKINS,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

HETTY  SHEPARD  WHEELER,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Musical  Theory. 

»  Absent  on  leave.  • 


14  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

MARIANA  COGSWELL,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  German  and  Greek. 

MABEL  ELISABETH  HODDER,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  History. 

MAUDE  CIPPERLY  WIEGAND,  B.A., 
Instructor  in  Botany. 

ELIZABETH  WHEELER  MANWARING,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

CAROLINA  MARCIAL,  B.A., 
Instructor  in  Spanish. 

AMY  KELLY,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

MAGDELEINE  OTTEN  C ARRET,  Lie.  es  L., 
Instructor  in  French. 

PAULINE  MARIE  REGNIE,  Lie.  i>s  L., 
Instructor  in  French. 

GUSTI  SCHMIDT, 

Instructor  in  German. 

ALICE  MARIA  OTTLEY,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Botany. 

CARRIE  MAUDE  HOLT,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Zoology. 

ELIZABETH  MANNING  GARDINER,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Art. 

JOSEPHINE  HARDING  BATCHELDER,  B.A., 
Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

ALICE  HASKELL,  M.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

LAETITIA  MORRIS  SNOW,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  Botany. 

MARGARET  HARRIS  COOK,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  Zoology. 


1909-10  Faculty  15 

ELEANOR  DENSMORE  WOOD,  B.A., 
Instructor  in  Biblical  History. 

ANNA  PRICHITT  YOUNGMAN,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  Economics. 

ESTELLA  MAY  FEARON,  B.S., 

Instructor  in  Physical  Education. 

MABEL  LOUISE  ROBINSON,  M.A., 
Instructor  in  Zoology. 

CLARA  ELIZA  SMITH,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  Mathematics. 

5  MARY  BO  WEN  BRAINERD,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  English  Literature. 

AMELIE  SERAFON, 

Instructor  in  French. 

HELEN  DODD  COOK,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  Psychology. 

VIRGINIA  JUDITH  CRAIG,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  Latin. 

LOUISE  SHERWOOD  McDOWELL,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  Physics. 

CHARLOTTE  REINECKE,  Ph.D., 
Instructor  in  German. 

CARL  OSCAR  LOUIS  COLLIN,  M.D., 

Instructor  in  the  Theory  and  Practice  of  Physical  Education. 

FREDERICK  HAVEN  PRATT,  M.A.,  M.D., 
Instructor  in  Physiology  and  Hygiene. 

EUNICE  BLANCHE  STERLING,  M.D., 

Instructor  in  Physical  Education. 

LORETTO  FISH  CARNEY, 

Instructor  in  Physical  Education. 

ANNIE  CHAPIN  STEDMAN, 

Instructor  in  Physical  Education. 

6  For  the  first  semester. 


16  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

EDNA  LOIS  WILLIAMS, 

Instructor  in  Physical  Education. 

MARION  WHEELER  HARTWELL, 
Instructor  in  Physical  Education. 

EUPHEMIA  RICHARDSON  WORTHINGTON,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  Mathematics. 

LOUISE  FARGO  BROWN,  Ph.D., 

Instructor  in  History. 

JEANNE  CHERON,  Lie.  es  L., 
Instructor  in  French. 

HELENE  BUHLERT  MAGEE,  B.A., 

Instructor  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

EMILY  JOSEPHINE  HURD, 
Instructor  in  Pianoforte. 

EBEN  FARRINGTON  COMINS, 
Instructor  in  Drawing. 

EDITH  ESTELLE  TORREY, 
Instructor  in  Vocal  Music. 

ALBERT  THOMAS  FOSTER, 
Instructor  in  Violin. 

ALICE  AYERS  CUMMINGS, 
Instructor  in  Pianoforte. 

SUSAN  JOSEPHINE  HART, 

Assistant  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 

FLORENCE  CONVERSE,  M.A., 

Assistant  in  English  Literature. 

HELEN  SOMERSBY  FRENCH,  B.A., 
Assistant  in  Chemistry. 

EMILY  PAULINE  LOCKE,  M.A., 

Assistant  in  Botany. 

ELIZABETH  BOGMAN  POPE,  B.A., 

Assistant  in  Rhetoric  and  Composition. 


1909-10  Faculty  17 

MARGARET  ELIZABETH  SAWTELLE,  B.A., 
Assistant  in  Phjsics. 

LEAH  BROWN  ALLEN,  B.A., 
Assistant  in  Astronomy. 

MARGARET  KREUTZ, 

Assistant  in  Physical  Education. 

LUCY  MIDDLETON  GRISCOM,  M.S., 
Assistant  in  Chemistry. 

LULU  GENEVA  ELDRIDGE,  M.A., 

Assistant  in  Latin. 

SUZANNE  EMMELINE  DEBRIE,  B.  es.  L., 
Assistant  in  French. 

RUTH  WEIR  RAEDER,  B.A., 
Assistant  in  Geology. 

HARRIET  MANNING  BLAKE,  B.A., 
Assistant  in  English  Literature. 

SARAH  JONES  WOODWARD,  B.A., 
Assistant  in  Psychology. 

ALBERT  PITTS  MORSE, 

Curator    of    Zoology   Museum   and   Assistant    in   Zoology 
Laboratories. 

MARY  MARIAN  FULLER, 

Curator  of  Chemistry  Laboratory. 

ELIZABETH  PHEBE  WHITING, 

Curator  of  the  Whitin  Observatory. 

JULIA  ANN  WOOD  HEWITT,  B.A., 
Curator  of  Zoology  Laboratories. 

MABEL  ANNIE  STONE,  B.A., 
Curator  of  Botany  Museum. 


GERTRUDE  CLARA  SCHOPPERLE,  Ph.D. 

Alice  Freeman  Palmer  Fellow.  ' 


18  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

JOHN  DEWEY,  Ph.D.,  LL.D., 

Lecturer  in  Philosophy. 

EDWARD  ERASTUS  BANCROFT,  M.A.,  M.D., 
Consulting  Physician. 

MYRTELLE  MOORE  CANAVAN,  M.D., 
Medical  Examiner. 

SOPHIE  GOUDGE  LAWS,  M.D., 

Assistant  Medical  Examiner. 


HARRIET  HAWES, 

Librarian  Emeritus. 

3 CAROLINE  FRANCES  PIERCE,  B.A., 
Librarian. 

HENRIETTA  ST.  BARBE  BROOKS,  B.S., 
Acting  Librarian. 

ETHEL  DANE  ROBERTS,  B.A.,  B.L.S., 

Assistant  Librarian. 

NANCY  MAY  POND,  B.S.,  B.L.S., 

Curator  of  Art  Library  and  Collections. 

LILLA  WEED,  B.A., 

Cataloguer. 
8  Absent  on  leave. 


1909-10        Officers  of  Administration  19 

OFFICERS  OF  ADMINISTRATION 


CAROLINE  HAZARD,  M.A.,  Litt.D.,  LL.D., 
President. 

ELLEN  FITZ  PENDLETON,  M.A., 
Dean. 

OLIVE  DAVIS,  B.S., 

Director  of  Halls  of  Residence  and  Lecturer  on  Domestic 
Science. 

KATHARINE  PIATT  RAYMOND,  B.S.,  M.D., 

Resident  Physician  and  Instructor  in  Hygiene. 

EDITH  SOUTHER  TUFTS,  M.A., 
Registrar. 

MARY  CASWELL, 

Secretary  to  the  President. 

MARY  FRAZER  SMITH,  B.A., 
Secretary  to  the  Dean.' 

DOROTHEA  WELLS,  B.A., 

Corresponding  Secretary  to  the  Dean. 

HELEN  RICH  NORTON,  B.A., 

Secretary  to  the  Director  of  Halls  of  Residence 

GEORGE  GOULD, 

Cashier. 

BERTHA  LYDIA  CASWELL, 

Assistant  Cashier  and  Purchasing  Agent. 

CHARLOTTE  SCOTT  WHITON, 
Purveyor. 

ANNA  STEDMAN  NEWMAN, 

Superintendent  of  Norumbega  Cottage. 

LOUISE  ANNIE  DENNISON, 

Superintendent  of  Freeman  Cottage. 

MARY  ELIZABETH  COOK, 

Superintendent  of  Wood  Cottage. 


20  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

MARY  ELIDA  RUST, 

Superintendent  of  Noanett  House. 

MARY  SNOW, 

Superintendent  of  Pomeroj  Hall. 

HELEN  WILLARD  LYMAN,  B.A., 

Superintendent  of  Stone  Hall. 

ELEANOR  SHERWIN,  B.A., 

Superintendent  of  Fiske  Cottage. 

EVA  FANNY  SWIFT, 

Superintendent  of  Crofton  House  and  Ridgeway  Refectory. 

EMMA  CULROSS  GIBBONS,  Ph.B., 
Superintendent  of  Beebe  Hall. 

MABEL  WOLCOTT  BROWN,  B.A., 
Superintendent  of  Cazenove  Hall. 

ELSIE  PRESTON  LEONARD,  B.A., 
Superintendent  of  Wilder  Hall. 

LUCY  MIDDLETON  GRISCOM,  M.S., 
Superintendent  of  Eliot  Cottage. 

HARRIET  LESTER, 

Superintendent  of  Shafer  Hall. 

ADA  VINCENT, 

Superintendent  of  Webb  House. 

MABEL  PRIEST  DANIEL,  B.A., 

Superintendent  of  Lovewell  House. 

FLORENCE  EVELYN  McGOWAN, 

Superintendent  of  Domestic  Service  in  College  Hall. 

BERTHA  MOULTON  BECKFORD, 

Manager  of  Bookstore  and  Post  Office. 

DOROTHEA  SHELDON  LOCKWOOD,  B.A., 
Assistant  to  the  Registrar. 


EMERSON  OREN  PERKINS, 

Superintendent  of  the  College  Plant, 

FREDERICK  DUTTON  WOODS,  B.S., 
Superintendent  of  Grounds. 


STANDING   COMMITTEES 


Board  of  Admission. — Professors  Chapin  (  Cha{rma7i) ,  Bates, 
Burrell,  Colin,  Kendall,  Miiller,  Roberts,  Whiting;  Associate  Pro- 
fessors Waite,  Walton  ;  the  Dean  of  the  College  ex  officio. 

Committee  on  Graduate  Instruction. — Professors  Calkins 
{Chairman),  Miiller,  Ferguson;  Associate  Professors  Merrill, 
Edwards,  Orvis ;  the  Dean  ex  officio. 

Library  Committee. — Miss  Brooks  {Chairmayi)  ;  Professors 
Hayes,  Willcox,  Colin,  Brown;  Associate  Professor  Scudder ;  the 
President  and  Librarians  ex  officio. 

Committee  on  Instruction.— Dean  Pendleton  {Chairman 
ex  officio).  Professors  Burrell,  McKeag,  Kendrick;  Associate  Pro- 
fessors Walton,  Waite,  Hubbard. 

Committee  on  Academic  Rec^uests. — Professors  Roberts, 
Chapin ;  Associate  Professors  Locke,  Gamble,  Perry ;  Miss  Bliss ; 
Dean  Pendleton  {Chairman  ex  officio). 

Committee  on  Constitutions. — Associate  Professors  Perry 
{Chairjnan),  Hamilton;  Miss  Abbot. 

Committee  on  Student  Publications. — Miss  Newkirk 
{Chairman),  Professor  Whiting;  Associate  Professor  Jackson; 
Misses  Brooks,  Lathrop. 

Committee  on  Student  Entertainments. — Associate  Pro- 
fessors Moffett  {Chairman),  Thompson,  Bennett;  INIrs.  Hodder, 
and,  ex  offlcio,  the  Registrar,  the  Resident  Physician. 

Committee  on  Non-Academic  Interests. — Professors  Ken- 
dall {Chair 7na7i) ,  Coman  ;  Associate  Professors  Vivian,  Lock- 
wood,  Robertson  ;  and,  ex  officio,  the  Dean,  the  Director  of  Halls 
of  Residence,  the  Resident  Physician,  the  Registrar,  the  Chairmen 
of  the  Committees  on  Student  Entertainments,  Constitutions, 
and  Publications. 


WELLKSLEY   COLLEGE 

Wellesley,  Massachusetts 


FOUNDATION    AND    PURPOSE 

Wellesley  College  was  established  for  the  purpose  of  fur- 
nishing to  young  women  who  desire  to  obtain  a  liberal  education 
such  advantages  and  facilities  as  are  enjoyed  in  institutions  of 
the  highest  grade.  The  first  building  of  the  College,  erected 
and  equipped  under  the  supervision  and  through  the  personal 
means  of  the  founder,  was  opened  to  students  in  1875,  with  the 
announced  purpose  "  of  giving  to  young  women  opportunities 
for  education  equivalent  to  those  usually  provided  in  colleges 
for  young  men."  Throughout  his  work  the  founder  aimed  to 
put  into  visible  form  his  ideal  of  the  higher  education  for 
women,  "the  supreme  development  and  unfolding  of  every 
power  and  faculty." 

By  the  charter,  granted  by  the  Commonwealth  of  Massachu- 
setts, "  the  corporation  of  Wellesley  College  is  authorized  to 
grant  such  honorary  testimonials,  and  confer  such  honors,  de- 
grees, and  diplomas,  as  are  granted  or  conferred  by  any  Uni- 
versity, College,  or  Seminary  of  learning  in  this  Commonwealth  ; 
and  the  diplomas  so  granted  shall  entitle  the  possessors  to  the 
immunities  and  privileges  allowed,  by  usage  or  statute,  to  the 
possessors  of  Hke  diplomas  from  any  University,  College,  or 
Seminary  of  learning  in  this  Commonwealth." 

In  accordance  with  the  spirit  of  the  founder,  the  College  is 
undenominational,  but  distinctively  Christian  in  its  influence, 
discipHne,  and  instruction. 

The  members  of  the  College  meet  daily  for  morning  prayers 
in  the  beautiful  chapel  presented  in  1899  by  Miss  Elizabeth  G. 


24  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

Houghton  and  Mr.  Clement  S.  Houghton  as  a  memorial  to 
their  father.  Services  on  Sunday  are  conducted  in  this  chapel 
by  preachers  of  different  denominations.  At  all  these  services 
and  at  vespers  on  Sunday,  the  singing  is  led  by  a  trained  choir 
of  students  under  the  direction  of  the  professor  of  music. 

The  Wellesley  College  Christian  Association,  organized  to 
promote  religious  life,  to  arouse  an  intelhgent  interest  in  social 
reforms,  and  to  foster  interest  in  home  and  foreign  missions, 
meets  weekly  for  prayer  and  religious  instruction  in  the  chapel 
given  by  the  founder  of  the  College. 

The  department  of  Biblical  History  affords  the  systematic 
study  of  the  Bible  required  of  all  students. 


1909-10  Admission  25 


ADMISSION 

Applications  for  admission  should  be  made  upon  forms 
which  will  be  furnished  by  the  Dean  on  request.  An  applica- 
tion fee  of  ten  dollars  is  required  from  all  candidates  for 
admission,  and  no  application  is  recorded  until  this  fee  is 
received  (see  page  142).  It  is  desirable  that  applications 
should  be  made  several  years  in  advance,  since  rooms  in 
college  houses  are  assigned  to  new  students  in  the  order  of 
application  for  admission  to  College.  However,  attention  is 
called  to  the  fact  that  a  place  will  not  be  reserved  for  an 
applicant  whose  credentials  filed  in  July  do  not  satisfactorily 
cover  twelve  of  the  fifteen  points  required  for  admission. 
Moreover,  since  the  number  of  new  students  admitted  is 
limited  by  the  capacity  of  lecture  rooms,  for  the  past  few 
years  it  has  been  found  necessary  early  in  the  year  to  close 
the  application  list  for  the  following  September.  Candidates, 
therefore,  who  delay  their  applications  beyond  the  first  of  Jan- 
uary of  the  year  in  which  they  propose  to  enter  are  liable  to 
find  the  application  list  closed. 


ADMISSION^    TO    THE    FRESHMAI<ir    CLASS 

Students  are  admitted  either  by  examination  (see  pages  41 
to  44)  or  by  certificate  (see  pages  44  to  46). 

Every  candidate  for  a  degree  must  offer  for  admission  to 
the  freshman  class  subjects  amounting  to  fifteen  "points." 
The  points  assigned  to  the  subjects  indicate  the  number 
of  years,  with  five  recitations  a  week,  which  will  normally 
be  required  in  the  secondary  school  to  make  adequate 
preparation. 


26 


Wellesley  College 


1909-10 


Every  candidate  must  offer  :- 


English 

History 

Mathematics 

Latin   . 

A  Second  Language 

Greek  or  French  or  German  (maxi- 
mum) . 
A  Third  Language      .... 

Greek  or  French  or  German  (mini- 
mum) . 

or 
A  Science : 

Chemistry  or  Physics 


three  points, 
one  point, 
three  points, 
four  points, 
three  points. 


one  point. 


one  point. 


A  place  on  the  list  of  candidates  for  admission  will  not  be 
reserved  for  an  applicant  whose  credentials  filed  in  July  do 
not  satisfactorily  cover  twelve  of  the  fifteen  points  required 
for  admission.  Candidates  will  not  be  admitted  if  conditioned 
in  two,  or  if  heavily  conditioned  in  one,  of  the  following  sub- 
jects :  Latin,  Greek,  French,  German,  Mathematics,  Chem- 
istry, Physics. 

The  subjects  prescribed  for  admission  are  divided  into  three 
groups.  A,  B,  C,  as  follows  : — 

Group  A,  English  a,  History,  Plane  Geometry,  Caesar, 
CicerO;  Vergil  and  Prosody,  Greek  Grammar,  Anabasis,  Iliad, 
German  maximum  requirement  (except  prose  composition  and 
the  use  of  the  spoken  language),  French  maximum  require- 
ment (except  prose  composition  and  the  use  of  the  spoken 
language). 

Group  B.     Chemistry  and  Physics. 

Group  C.  English  b  (including  Composition),  Algebra, 
Latin  Prose  Composition,  Greek  Prose  Composition,  French 
(prose  composition  and  the  use  of  the  spoken  language  of  the 
maximum  requirement),  German  (prose  composition  and  the 
use  of  the  spoken  language  of  the  maximum  requirement), 
Greek,  French,  and  German  minimum  requirements. 


1909-10  Admission  27 

Final  examinations  in  subjects  of  Group  A  may  be  taken  at 
any  time  during  the  college  preparatory  course.  Final  exam- 
inations in  subjects  of  Group  B  must  be  taken  not  earlier  than 
fifteen  months  before  entrance  in  September.  Final  examina- 
tions in  subjects  of  Group  C  must  be  taken  7iot  earlier  than 
during  the  school  year  immediately  preceding  admission  to 
college. 

ly  The  above  applies  to  final  examinations  held  by  prin- 
cipals of  schools,  preliminary  to  granting  certificates,  as  well 
as  to  the  admission  examinations. 

A^  candidate  for  admission  must  be  at  least  sixteen  years  of 
age,  and  must  present  satisfactory  evidence  of  good  moral 
character  and  good  health.  A  blank  form  for  the  certificate 
of  health  will  be  sent  to  all  registered  applicants  for  admission. 

The  student  who  has  met  all  entrance  requirements  is  quaU- 
fied  for  immediate  matriculation  for  the  Baccalaureate  degree 
in  Arts.  All  communications  concerning  admission  should  be 
addressed  to  the  Dean  of  Wellesley  College,  Wellesley,  Mass. 

DEFi:N^ITIO]Sr  OF  REQUIREMENTS 

The  number  enclosed  in  parentheses  following  the  subject  indi- 
cates the  number  of  points  assigned  to  that  subject,  that  is,  the 
number  of  years  with  five  recitations  a  week  which  will  normally 
be  required  in  the  secondary  school  for  adequate  preparation  in  the 
subject.  If  the  certificate  of  a  candidate  shows  that  the  time  given 
to  any  subject  is  less  than  that  indicated  as  necessary  by  the  num- 
ber of  points  an  examination  may  be  required. 

ENGLISH  C3) 

Requirement  for  1910,  1911,  and   1913 

Literature, 
a.     Reading  and  Practice. 

Certain  books  are  set  for  reading.  The  candidate  is  re- 
quired to  present  evidence  of  a  general  knowledge  of  the 
subject-matter,  and  to  answer  simple  questions  on  the  lives  of 
the  authors. 


28  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

The  books  set  for  this  part  of  the  examination  are  :— 

Grovip  I  (two  to  be  selected).  Shakespeare's  As  You  Like  It, 
Henry  F,  Julius  Casar,  The  Merchant  of  Venice,  Tivelfth  Night. 

Group  II  (one  to  be  selected).  Bacon's  Essays;  Bunvan's  The 
Pilgrim's  Progress,  Part  I;  the  Sir  Roger  de  Co-verley  Papers  in  the 
Spectator;  Franklin's  Autobiography. 

Group  III  (one  to  be  selected) .  Chaucer's  Pro/o^wf;  Spenser's 
Faerie  ^ueene  (selections)  ;  Pope's  The  Rape  of  the  Lock;  Gold- 
smith's The  Deserted  Village;  Palgrave's  Golden  Treasury  (first 
series),  Books  II  and  III  with  especial  attention  to  Dryden,  Col- 
lins, Gray,  Cowper,  and  Burns. 

Group  IV  (two  to  be  selected).  Goldsmith's  The  Vicar  of  fVake- 
field;  Scott's  Ivanhoe;  Scott's  ^entin  Dur^ard;  Hawthorne's 
The  House  of  the  Se-ven  Gables;  Thackeray's  Henry  Esmond;  Mrs. 
Gaskell's  Cranford;  Dickens's  A  Tale  of  Tnxjo  Cities;  George  Eliot's 
Silas  Marner;  Blackmore's  Lorna  T>oone. 

Group  V  (two  to  be  selected).  Irving's  Sketch  Book;  Lamb's 
Essays  of  Elia;  De  Qixincey's  Joan  of  Arc,  and  The  English  Mail 
Coach;  Carlyle's  Heroes  and  Hero  Worship,  or  his  Hero  as  Poet, 
Man  of  Letters  and  as  King;  Emerson's  Essays  (selected)  ;  Ruskin's 
Sesame  and  Lilies. 

Group  VI  (two  to  be  selected).  Coleridge's  The  Ancient  Mar- 
iner; Scott's  The  Lady  of  the  Lake;  Byron's  Mazeppa,  and  The 
Prisoner  of  Chilian;  Palgrave's  Golden  Treasury  (first  series), 
Book  IV,  with  special  attention  to  Wordsworth,  Keats,  and  Shelley; 
Macaulay's  Lays  of  Ancient  Rome;  Poe's  Poems;  Lowell's  The 
Vision  of  Sir  Launfal;  Arnold's  Sohrab  and  Riistum;  Longfellow's 
The  Courtship  of  Miles  Standish;  Tennyson's  Gareth  and  Lynette, 
Lancelot  and  Elaine,  and  The  Passing  of  Arthur;  Browning's 
Cavalier  Tunes,  The  Lost  Leader,  Hoiv  They  'Brought  the  Good 
Neavs  from  Ghent  to  Aix,  Enjelyn  Hope,  Home  Thoughts  from 
Abroad,  Home  Thoughts  from  the  Sea,  Incident  of  the  French 
Camp,  The  Boy  and  the  Angel,  One  Word  More,  Her've  Riel, 
Pheidippides. 

b.     Study  and  Practice. 

This  part  of  the  examination  presupposes  the  thorough 
study  of  each  of  the  works  named  on  the  following  page.  The 
examination  will  be  upon  subject-matter,  form,  and  structure 


1909-10  Admission  29 

The  books  set  for  this  part  of  the  examination  are  : — 
Shakespeare's  Macbeth;  Milton's  Lycidas^  Comus,  V Allegro,  and 
//  Penseroso;  Burke's  Speech  on  Conciliation  ivith  America,  or  Wash- 
ington's Farenvell  Address  and  Webster's  First  Bunker  Hill  Oration; 
Macaulaj's  Life  of  Johnson  or  Carljle's  Essay  on  "Burns. 

Note. — In  the  Wellesley  examination  it  is  taken  for  granted 
that  candidates  will  have  learned  by  heart  illustrative  passages  from 
all  poems  read.  Books  set  in  the  requirements  of  previous  years 
are  satisfactory  substitutes. 

Composition. — To  test  the  candidate's  command  of  clear 
and  accurate  English,  she  will  be  required  to  write  brief  com- 
positions upon  one  or  more  topics  drawn  from  the  assigned 
readings  in  b,  as  indicated.  The  topics  will  call  for  only  a 
general  knowledge  of  the  substance  of  the  books.  After  1910 
the  candidate  will  also  be  required  to  write  upon  one  or  more 
subjects  of  ordinary  experience  or  knowledge,  not  taken  from 
the  prescribed  books. 

To  meet  the  requirement  in  Composition  : — 

1.  There  should  be  practice  in  writing  equivalent  to  fortnightly 
themes  the  first  two  years,  and  weekly  themes  the  last  two  years 
of  the  preparatory  course.  The  subjects  for  themes  should  not  be 
drawn  chiefly  from  books.  The  student  should  be  led,  especially 
for  short  themes,  to  choose  her  own  subjects,  based  on  daily  expe- 
rience and  observation.  She  must  be  able  to  spell,  capitalize  and 
punctuate  correctly.  She  must  have  a  practical  knowledge  of  the 
essentials  of  English  grammar,  including  ordinary  grammatical 
terminology,  inflection,  syntax,  the  use  of  phrases  and  clauses. 

2.  The  study  of  the  theory  of  Rhetoric  should  be  distinctly  sub- 
ordinate to  the  needs  of  the  student  in  composition,  and  limited  to 
the  broad  essentials.  She  should  study  the  structure  of  sentence 
and  paragraph ;  she  should  analyze  and  make  outlines  of  essays 
with  a  view  to  understanding  the  orderly  development  of  thought  ; 
she  should  be  taught  the  principles  of  unity,  coherence,  and  em- 
phasis, not  in  the  abstract  but  as  exemplified  in  her  own  work 
and  the  work  of  others ;  she  should  be  taught  thoroughly  the 
common  idiom  of  the  language.  The  following  books  are  recom- 
mended : — 

Scott  and  Denney's  Composition-Rhetoric;  Carpenter's  Exercises 
in  Rhetoric  and  Composition  (High  School  Course) ;  Robbin's  and 


30  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

Perkins's  Introduction  to  the  Study  o//?/!f/orz>  supplemented  by  Her- 
rick  and  Damon's  Composition  and  Rhetoric;  or  A.  S.  Hill's  Foun- 
dations of  Rhetoric;  or  Webster's  Literature  and  Composition. 

The  final  examination  in  English  d  (including  Composition) 
must  be  taken  not  earlier  than  during  the  school  year  immediately 
preceding  admission  to  College. 

Requirement  for   1913,   1914,  and   1915 

Preparation  in  English  has  two  main  objects  :  (i)  command 
of  correct  and  clear  English,  spoken  and  written;  (2)  ability 
to  read  with  accuracy,  intelligence,  and  appreciation. 

English  Granunar  and  Composition, — The  first  object  re- 
quires instruction  in  grammar  and  composition.  English 
grammar  should  ordinarily  be  reviewed  in  the  secondary 
school ;  and  correct  spelling  and  grammatical  accuracy  should 
be  rigorously  exacted  in  connection  with  all  written  work 
during  the  four  years.  The  principles  of  English  composi- 
tion governing  punctuation,  the  use  of  words,  paragraphs,  and 
the  different  kinds  of  whole  composition,  including  letter- 
writing,  should  be  thoroughly  mastered ;  and  practice  in  com- 
position, oral  as  well  as  written,  should  extend  throughout  the 
secondary  school  period.  Written  exercises  may  well  com- 
prise narration,  description,  and  easy  exposition  and  argument 
based  upon  simple  outHnes.  It  is  advisable  that  subjects  for 
this  work  be  taken  from  the  student's  personal  experience, 
general  knowledge,  and  studies  other  than  EngHsh,  as  well  as 
from  her  reading  in  literature.  Finally,  special  instruction  in 
language  and  composition  should  be  accompanied  by  con- 
certed effort  of  teachers,  in  all  branches  to  cultivate  in  the 
student  the  habit  of  using  good  English  in  her  recitations  and 
various  exercises,  whether  oral  or  written. 

Literature. — The  second  object  is  sought  by  means  of  two 
lists  of  books,  headed  respectively  Reading  and  Study,  from 
which  may  be  framed  a  progressive  course  in  literature  cover- 
ing four  years.     In  connection  with  both  lists,  the  student 


1909-10  Admission  31 

should  be  trained  in  reading  aloud  and  be  encouraged  to  com- 
mit to  memory  some  of  the  more  notable  passages,  both  in  verse 
and  in  prose.  As  an  aid  to  literary  appreciation,  she  is  further 
advised  to  acquaint  herself  with  the  most  important  facts  in 
the  lives  of  the  authors  whose  works  she  reads  and  with  their 
place  in  literary  history. 

a.  Reading. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  foster  in  the  student  the  habit  of  in- 
telligent reading  and  to  develop  a  taste  for  good  literature,  by  giving 
her  a  first-hand  knowledge  of  some  of  its  best  specimens.  She 
should  read  the  books  carefully,  but  her  attention  should  not  be  so 
fixed  upon  details  that  she  fails  to  appreciate  the  main  purpose  and 
charm  of  whaX  she  reads. 

With  a  view  to  a  great  freedom  of  choice,  the  books  pro- 
vided for  reading  are  arranged  in  the  following  groups,  from 
which  at  least  ten  units*  are  to  be  selected, — two  from  each 
group  :— 

Group  I  (two  to  be  selected) .  The  Old  Testament,  comprising 
at  least  the  chief  narrative  episodes  in  Genesis,  Exodus,  Joshua, 
Judges,  Samuel,  Kings,  and  Daniel,  together  with  the  books  of 
Ruth  and  Esther;  Homer's  Odyssey ^  with  the  omission,  if  desired, 
of  Books  I,  II,  III,  IV,  V,  XV,  XVI,  XVII;  Homer's  Iliad, 
with  the  omission,  if  desired,  of  Books  XI,  XIII,  XIV,  XV,  XVII, 
XXI ;  Vergil's  ^neid.  The  Odyssey,  Iliad,  and  JEneid  should  be 
read  in  English  translations  of  recognized  literary  excellence. 

(For  any  unit  of  this  group  a  unit  from  any  other  group  may  be 
substituted. 

Group  II  (two  to  be  selected).  Shakespeare's  Merchant  of  Venice, 
Midsummer  Night's  Dream,  As  You  Like  It,  Ttvelfth  Night,  Henry 
V,  Julius  Casar. 

Group  III  (two  to  be  selected) .  Defoe's  %obinson  Crusoe,  Part  I ; 
Goldsmith'' s  Fi car  of  fTakeJi eld;  Scott's  I'uanhoe,  or  ^entin  Dur- 
njuard;  Hawthorne's  House  of  the  Se'ven  Gables;  'Dickens's  David  Cop- 
perfield,  or  Tale  of  Tivo  Cities;  Thackeray's  Henry  Esmond;  Mrs. 
Gaskell's  Cranford;  George  Eliot's  Silas  Marner;  Stevenson's 
Treasure  Island. 

*Each  unit  is  set  off  by  semicolons. 


32  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

Group  IV  (two  to  be  selected).  Bunjan's  Pilgrim's  Progress, 
Part  I ;  the  Sir  %oger  de  Co'verley  Papers  in  the  Spectator;  Frank- 
lin's Autobiography  (condensed)  ;  Irving's  Sketch  Book;  Macaulay's 
Essay  on  Lord  Cli-ve,  and  Essay  on  IVarren  Hastings;  Thackeray's 
English  Humourists ;  Selections  from  Lincoln,  including  at  least  the 
two  Inaugurals  and  Lincoln's  Speeches  in  Independence  Hall  and 
at  Gettysburg,  Last  Public  Address,  Letter  to  Horace  Greeley, 
along  with  a  brief  memoir  or  estimate;  Parkman's  Oregon  Trail; 
Thoreau's  Walden,  or  VLu^iXey's,  Autobiography,  and  Selections  from 
Lay  Sermons^  including  the  addresses  on  Improving  Natural  Knoivl- 
edge,  A  Liberal  Education,  and  A  Piece  of  Chalk;  Stevenson's  Inland 
Voyage,  and  Travels  ivith  a  Donkey. 

Group  V  (two  to  be  selected).  Palgrave's  Golden  Treasury  (First 
Series),  Books  II  and  III,  with  especial  attention  to  Dryden,  Col- 
lins, Gray,  Cowper,  and  Burns  ;  Gray's  Elegy  in  a  Country  Church- 
yard; Goldsmith's  Deserted  Village;  Coleridge's  Ancient  Mariner; 
Lowell's  Vision  of  Sir  Launfal;  Scott's  Lady  of  the  Lake;  Byron's 
Childe  Harold,  Canto  IV,  and  The  Prisoner  of  Chillon;  Palgrave's 
Golden  Treasury  (First  Series),  Book  IV,  with  especial  attention  to 
Wordsworth,  Keats,  and  Shelley  ;  Poe's  Raven;  Longfellow's  Court- 
ship of  Miles  Standish;  Whittier's  Snovo  Bound;  Macaulay's  Lays  of 
Ancient  %pme;  Arnold's  Sohrab  and  Rustum;  Tennyson's  Gareth 
and  Lynette,  Lancelot  and  Elaine,  The  Passing  of  Arthur;  Browning's 
Cavalier  Tunes,  The  Lost  Leader,  Hovu  They  "Brought  the  Good  News 
from  Ghent  to  Aix,  Home  Thoughts  from  Abroad,  Home  Thoughts  from 
the  Sea,  Incident  of  the  French  Camp,  Herve  Riel,  Pheidippides,  My 
Last  Duchess,  Up  at  a  Villa — Donvn  in  the  City. 

b.  Study. 

This  part  of  the  requirement  is  intended  as  a  natural  and  logical 
continuation  of  the  student's  earlier  reading,  with  greater  stress  laid 
vipon  form  and  style,  the  exact  meaning  of  words  and  phrases,  and 
the  understanding  of  allusions.  For  this  close  reading  are  provided 
a  play,  a  group  of  poems,  an  oration,  and  an  essay. 

Shakespeare's  Macbeth ;  Milton's  U Allegro,  II  Pe?iseroso,  and 
Cojnus ;  Burke's  Speech  on  Conciliation  with  America,  or  both 
Washington's  Farewell  Address  and  Webster's  First  Bunker  Hill 
Oration;  Macaulay's  Life  ofjohftson,  or  Carlyle's  Essay  on  Burtis. 

The  examination  will  be  divided  into  two  parts,  one  of 
which  may  be  taken  as  a  preliminary,  and  the  other  as  a  final. 


1909-10  Admission  33 

However  accurate  in  subject-matter,  no  paper  will  be 
considered  satisfactory  if  seriously  defective  in  punctuation, 
spelling,  or  other  essentials  of  good  usage. 

The  first  part  of  the  examination  will  be  upon  ten  units  chosen, 
in  accordance  with  the  plan  described  earlier,  from  the  lists  headed 
Reading  (English  a)  ;  and  it  may  include  also  questions  upon  gram- 
mar and  the  simpler  principles  of  rhetoric,  and  a  short  composition 
upon  some  topic  drawn  from  the  student's  general  knowledge  or  ex- 
perience. On  the  books  prescribed  for  reading,  the  form  of  the 
examination  will  usually  be  the  writing  of  short  paragraphs  on 
several  topics  which  the  candidate  may  choose  out  of  a  considerable 
number.  These  topics  will  involve  such  knowledge  and  appreciation 
of  plot,  character-development,  and  other  qualities  of  style  and 
treatment  as  may  be  fairly  expected  of  young  students.  In  grammar 
and  rhetoric,  the  candidate  may  be  asked  speciiic  questions  upon 
the  practical  essentials  of  these  studies,  such  as  the  relation  of  the 
various  parts  of  a  sentence  to  one  another,  the  construction  of  indi- 
vidual words  in  a  sentence  of  reasonable  difficulty,  and  those  good 
usages  of  modern  English  which  one  should  know  in  distinction 
from  current  errors. 

The  second  part  of  the  examination  will  include  composition  and 
those  books  comprised  in  the  list  headed  Study  (English  d) .  The 
test  in  composition  will  consist  of  one  or  more  essays,  developing  a 
theme  through  several  paragraphs ;  the  subjects  will  be  drawn  from 
the  books  prescribed  for  Study,  from  the  candidate's  other  studies,  and 
from  her  personal  knowledge  and  experiences  quite  apart  from  read- 
ing. For  this  purpose  the  examiner  will  provide  several  subjects, 
perhaps  five  or  six,  from  which  the  candidate  may  make  her  own 
selections.  The  test  on  the  books  prescribed  for  study  will  consist 
of  questions  upon  their  content,  form,  and  structure,  and  upon  the 
meaning  of  such  words,  phrases,  and  allusions  as  may  be  necessary 
to  an  understanding  of  the  works  and  an  appreciation  of  their  salient 
qualities  of  style.  General  questions  may  also  be  asked  concerning 
the  lives  of  the  authors,  their  other  works,  and  the  periods  of 
literary  history  to  which  they  belong. 

The  final  examination  in  English  d  (including  Composition) 
must  be  taken  not  earlier  than  during  the  school  year  immediately 
preceding  admission  to  College. 


34  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

HISTORY  (1) 

A  full  year  course  in  one  of  the  following  subjects  : — 
(i)  Ancient  History,  including  a  brief  introductory  study 
of  the  earlier  nations,  but  with  special  emphasis  on   Greek 
History  to  the  death  of  Alexander,  and  on  Roman  History  to 
the  accession  of  Commodus. 

(2)  English  History,  with  due  regard  to  social  and  political 
development. 

(3)  American  History,  with  the  elements  of  Civil  Gov- 
ernment. 

*  (4)  The  History  of  Greece  to  the  death  of  Alexander, 
with  due  reference  to  Greek  life,  literature,  and  art. 

*  (5)  The  History  of  Rome,  the  Republic  and  Empire,  to 
the  accession  of  Commodus. 

Candidates  are  advised  to  offer  the  course  in  Ancient  His- 
tory as  a  part  of  their  preparation. 

In  the  subject  chosen,  the  student  should  acquire  accurate 
knowledge  of  the  history  as  presented  in  a  standard  text-book  of 
not  less  than  300  pages,  and  should  read  such  fuller  authorities  as 
may  be  available,  in  amount  not  less  than  500  pages.  Some  prac- 
tice in  drawing  maps  to  illustrate  territorial  changes,  in  making 
digests  of  lectures  and  reading,  and  in  preparing  verbal  or  written 
reports  on  subjects  assigned  for  individual  investigation  is  essen- 
tial to  successful  work. 

Students  presenting  themselves  for  examination  are  expected  to 
bring  notebooks,  maps,  and  essays,  that  may  serve  as  supplemen- 
tary evidence  of  the  character  of  their  preparation. 

MATHEMATICS    C3) 

Algebra. — Factors,  Common  Divisors  and  Multiples,  Ratio 
and  Proportion,  Theory  of  Exponents  including  Imaginaries, 
Radicals  and  Equations  involving  Radicals,  Inequalities,  Quad- 
ratic Equations  (including  the  theory).  Binomial  Tneorem, 
Arithmetic  and  Geometric  Progressions. 

The  final  examination  in  Algebra  must  be  taken  not  earlier  than 
during  the  school  year  immediately  preceding  admission  to  college. 

*  After  September,  1910,  Greek  History  only  or  Roman  History  only  will  not 
be  accepter!  as  meeting  the  entrance  requirement. 


1909-10  Admission  35 

Plane  Geometry. — As  found  in  Chauvenet,  or  its  equivalent. 

Deficiency  in  preparation  usually  results  from  one  or  more  of 
the  following  causes  :  the  use  of  text-books  which  are  too  elemen- 
tary, insufficient  time  spent  in  preparation,  neglect  of  exercises  in 
original  demonstration  in  Geometry,  and  of  reviews  in  both  Alge- 
bra and  Geometry.  One  and  one-third  years,  with  daily  recita- 
tions, is  the  shortest  time  in  which  satisfactory  preparation  can  be 
made  in  Algebra,  and  one  year  with  daily  recitations  is  the  mini- 
mum in  Geometry.  It  is  strongly  urged  that  there  be  constant 
exercise  in  original  demonstration  in  Geometry,  with  frequent 
written  examinations  in  both  Algebra  and  Geometry,  the  problems, 
proposed  being  drawn  from  other  sources  than  the  text-books. 

LATIN  C4> 

Grammar,  including  Prosody. 
Prose  Composition. 

The  study  of  composition  should  form  a  part  of  each  year's  luork. 
The  aim  of  this  study  should  be  an  accurate  knowledge  of  the  main 
principles  of  Latin  syntax,  and  flexibility  in  the  use  of  both  English 
and  Latin  idiom.  It  is  suggested  that  these  ends  may  best  be 
secured  by  the  completion  of  a  standard  text-book  which  gives  a 
systematic  study  of  syntax,  together  with  the  writing  of  such  con- 
nected passages  based  on  Csesar  and  Cicero  as  will  emphasize  the 
differences  between  English  and  Latin  idiom. 

The  final  examination  in  Prose  Composition  must  be  taken  not 
earlier  than  during  the  school  year  immediately  preceding  admis- 
sion to  college. 

Caesar,  Gallic  War,  four  books. 

Cicero,  seven  orations,  or  six  if  the  Manilian  Law  be  one. 

Vergil,  ^neidy  six  books. 

Candidates  must  be  prepared  to  translate  at  sight  Latin  of 
average  difficulty,  and  to  write  in  Latin  connected  passages 
based  upon  Caesar  and  Cicero, 

Equivalents  are  accepted,  but  verse  is  not  accepted  in  place 
of  prose,  nor  anything  instead  of  the  required  translation  of 
English  into  Latin. 

The  teachers  of  Latin  in  the  preparatory  schools  are  urged; 
to  insist  upon  the  use  of  good  English  in  translation. 


36  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

The  study  of  Greek  is  strongly  recommended  to  candidates 
who  plan  to  elect  courses  in  Latin  in  college. 

Ability  to  read  at  sight  easy  French  or  German  prose  is  of 
great  advantage  to  all  classical  students. 

GREEK  CI   or  3) 
Maximum  Requirement  C3) 

Grammar.     The  etymology  must  be  thoroughly  mastered. 

Prose  Composition.  At  least  forty  written  exercises  based 
upon  the  Greek  of  Xenophon,  including  connected  passages 
and  accompanied  by  a  systematic  study  of  the  main  principles 
of  syntax. 

The  final  examination  in  Prose  Composition  must  be  taken  not 
earlier  than  dm-ing  the  school  year  immediately  preceding  admis- 
sion to  college. 

Xenophon,  Anabasis^  three  books. 

Homer,  Iliad,  three  books,  with  scansion. 

Candidates  must  be  prepared  to  translate  at  sight  both  Attic 
and  Homeric  Greek  of  average  difficulty,  and  to  write  in 
Greek  a  connected  passage  based  upon  Xenophon. 

Particular  attention  should  be  given  to  the  correct  -writing  of 
Greek  with  the  accents,  to  exercises  both  oral  and  written,  and  to 
the  use  of  the  blackboard  for  constant  practice  vipon  forms  and 
constructions. 

The  teachers  of  Greek  in  the  preparatory  schools  are  urged 
to  insist  upon  the  use  of  good  English  in  translation. 

Ability  to  read  at  sight  easy  French  or  German  prose  is  of 
great  advantage  to  all  classical  students. 

Minimum   Requirement  <1) 

Systematic  study  of  etymology  from  a  standard  grammar  in 
connection  with  a  book  of  First  Lessons.  Anabasis,  about 
thirty  pages.     Practice  in  writing  Greek. 

This  preparation  admits  the  student  to  course  14  in  College, 
and  these  two  courses  complete  the  preparation  for  course  i 
(see  page  95). 

The  final  examination  in  minimum  Greek  must  be  taken  not 
earlier  than  during  the  school  year  immediately  preceding  admis- 
sion to  college. 


1909-10  Admission  37 

FRKNCH  <i  or  3) 
Minimum  Requirement  CD 

The  preparation  for  this  requirement  should  comprise  : — 
(i)   Careful  drill  in  pronunciation. 

(2)  The  rudiments  of  grammar,  including  the  inflection  of 
the  regular  and  the  more  common  irregular  verbs,  of  nouns, 
adjectives,  participles,  and  pronouns  ;  the  simpler  uses  of  the 
conditional  and  subjunctive,  the  elementary  rules  in  syntax, 
and  their  application  in  the  construction  of  sentences. 

(3)  Abundant  easy  exercises,  designed  not  only  to  fix  in 
the  memory  the  forms  and  principles  of  grammar,  but  also  to 
cultivate  readiness  in  the  reproduction  of  natural  forms  of 
expression.  These  exercises  should  include  frequent  practice 
in  French  narrative,  with  a  due  regard  to  the  idiomatic  use  of 
tenses  such  as  Xhtpasseindefini,  the  i?nparfait,\hQConditionneL 

(4)  Writing  French  from  dictation. 

(5)  The  reading  of  300  duodecimo  pages  of  graduated 
texts  from  at  least  three  different  authors,  with  constant  prac- 
tice in  translating  into  French  easy  variations  upon  the  texts 
read,  and  in  reproducing  from  memory  sentences  previously 
read. 

(6)  Frequent  abstracts,  sometimes  oral  and  sometimes 
written,  of  portions  of  the  text  already  read. 

(7)  Training  from  the  outset  to  understand  French,  both 
when  spoken  and  read  aloud,  and  to  answer  ordinary  questions 
in  that  language. 

The  final  examination  in  minimum  French  must  be  taken  not 
earlier  than  during  the  school  year  immediately  preceding  adtnis- 
6ion  to  college. 

Maximum  Requirement  C3) 

To  meet  the  maximum  requirement  in  French,  the  candi- 
date must  present  the  whole  minimum  requirement  as  given 
above  and,  in  addition,  the  following  : — 

(i)   A  thorough,  practical  knowledge  of  grammar. 


88  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

.    (2)  Ability  to  translate   connected    paragraphs,  based  on 
standard  authors,  into  clear,  idiomatic  French. 

(3)  Ability  to  read  aloud  intelligently  ordinary  French  of 
the  present  day. 

(4)  Ability  to  understand  a  lecture  given  in  French. 

(5)  AbiHty  to  speak  correctly  and  idiomatically  in  French 
upon  simple  topics. 

(6)  The  reading  of  a  thousand  duodecimo  pages  (that  is, 
seven  hundred  pages  in  addition  to  the  amount  prescribed  for 
the  minimum  requirement)  from  at  least  four  authors,  as  in- 
dicated below. 

The  final  examination  in  maximum  French  must  be  taken  not 
earlier  than  during  the  school  year  immediately  preceding  admis- 
sion to  college. 

^^^  These  results  maybe  obtained  by  an  exhaustive  study  of 
any  good  grammar,  with  constant  practical  tests;  by  translation 
from  English  into  French;  by  paraphrasing  texts  read,  or,  by 
direct  free  composition  in  French,  together  with  critical  reading  of 
texts.  It  is  particularly  urged  that  these  texts  be  chosen  from 
nineteenth  century  writers  of  prose,  verse,  and  drama,  and  if 
possible  from  more  than  four  authors. 

In  order  to  secure  the  desired  results,  the  main  emphasis  should 
be  laid  on  the  correct  daily  use  of  the  spoken  language  in  the  class 
room,  on  the  correct  and  intelligent  reading  of  French  (apart  from 
translation)  and  on  prose  composition,  including  the  writing  of 
short  themes  in  French. 

The  texts  suggested  for  reading  are  : — 

(i)  For  minimum  requirement:  Laboulaye  :  Contes  bleus;  Dau- 
det :  Trois  contes  choisis ;  France:  Abeille  ;  Malot :  Sans  Famille  ; 
de  la  Brete  :  Mon  Oncle  et  Mon  Cure  ;  Enault :  Le  Chien  du  Capi- 
taine  ;  Legouve  et  Labiche  :  La  Cigale  chez  les  Fourmis. 

(2)  For  maximum  requirement :  Lamartine  :  Scenes  de  la  Revo- 
lution fran<^aise  ;  Vigny  :  La  Canne  de  Jonc  ;  Daudet :  Choix  d'  Ex- 
traits,  or,  Le  Petit  Chose ;  Maupassant :  Huit  Contes  Choisis  ; 
Renan  :  Sowvenirs  d^  Enfance  et  de  Jeunesse  ;  About :  Le  'Roi  des 
Montagnes  ;  Balzac  :  Le  Cure  de  Tours  ;  Colin  :  Contes  et  Saynetes 
(Ginn  &  Co.);  Colin:  Advanced  Sight  Translation;  Sandeau : 
Mile,  de  la  Seigliere  ;  Scribe  et  Legouve  :  Bataille  de  Dames  ;  Au- 
gier  :  Le  Gendre  de  M.  Poirier.  The  editions  recommended  are 
those  published  by  I).  C.  Heath  &  Co.,  except  Contes  et  Saynetes. 


1909-10  Admission  39 

GERMAN  CI  or  3) 
Minimum  Requirement  CD 

The  preparation  for  this  requirement  should  comprise  : — 
(i)   A  distinct  German  pronunciation  which  should  be  ac- 
quired at  the  outset  by  a  drill  in  phonetics. 

(2)  Drill  upon  the  rudiments  of  grammar;  that  is,  upon 
the  inflection  of  the  articles,  of  such  nouns  as  belong  to  the 
language  of  everyday  life,  adjectives,  pronouns,  weak  verbs, 
and  the  more  usual  strong  verbs ;  also  upon  the  use  of  the 
more  common  prepositions,  of  the  modal  auxiliary,  and  of 
the  elementary  rules  of  syntax  and  word  order.  This  drill 
upon  the  rudiments  of  grammar  should  be  directed  to  the 
end  of  enabling  the  pupil  (i)  to  use  his  knowledge  with 
facility  in  the  formation  of  sentences,  and  (2)  to  state  his 
knowledge  correctly  in  the  technical  language  of  grammar. 

(3)  Abundant  easy  exercises  designed  not  only  to  fix  in 
mind  the  forms  and  principles  of  grammar,  but  also  to  culti- 
vate readiness  in  the  oral  and  written  reproduction  of  natural 
forms  of  expression.  These  exercises  should  include  some 
practice  in  the  translation  into  German  of  easy  variations  upon 
the  matter  read. 

(4)  Mastery  of  a  vocabulary  sufficient  to  understand  and 
answer  in  German,  simple  questions  upon  the  texts  read. 

(5)  The  reading  of  about  200  pages  of  graduated  texts. 

(6)  Ability  to  read  or  write  German  script.  This  is  not 
an  absolute  requirement,  but  students  are  strongly  advised  to 
become  familiar  with  the  German  script  at  the  outset. 

The  final  examination  in  minimum  German  must  be  taken  not 
earlier  than  during  the  school  year  immediately  preceding  admis- 
sion to  college. 

Maximum  Requirement  C3) 

To  meet  the  maximum  requirement  in  German  the  candi- 
date must  present  the  whole  minimum  requirement  as  given 
above,  and  in  addition  the  following  : — 


40  Weli.esley  College  1909-10 

(i)  An  accurate  knowledge  of  more  advanced  grammar, 
;.  <?.,  of  the  less  usual  strong  verbs,  the  principle  uses  of 
prepositions  and  conjunctions,  the  elements  of  word  forma- 
tion, the  essentials  of  German  syntax,  the  uses  of  modal  aux- 
iliaries, of  the  subjunctive  and  infinitive  moods. 

(2)  Ability  to  speak  correctly  and  idiomatically  in  German 
upon  simple  topics,  and  to  understand  the  German  spoken  in 
the  class  room. 

(3)  Proficiency  in  paraphrasing,  in  freie  Reproduktion.  in 
writing  of  themes  based  on  the  works  read. 

(4)  Ability  to  translate  at  sight  simple  texts  not  only  from 
German  into  English  but  especially  from  English  into  German. 

(5)  The  reading  of  at  least  seven  hundred  pages  of  classical 
and  contemporaneous  authors  (that  is,  five  hundred  in  addition 
to  the  amount  for  the  minimum  requirement) . 

(6)  Knowledge  of  a  number  of  choice  lyric  poems  to  be 
selected  from  the  Volkslieder  and  from  Goethe's  lyrics 
especially. 

The  final  examination  in  maximum  German  must  be  taken  not 
earlier  than  during  the  school  year  immediately  preceding  admis- 
sion to  college. 

J^^The  desired  results  are  not  obtained  if  the  main  emphasis 
in  the  work  is  laid  on  translation  from  German  into  English  in- 
stead of  emphasizing  the  use  of  the  spoken  language  in  the  class 
room,  prose  composition,  and /rWf  Reproduktion. 

CHKMISTRY  CD 

The  requirement  is  met  by  the  course  outlined  in  the  Re- 
port of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board,  Document 
No.  40  or  44. 

The  student  should  perform  experiments  in  the  laboratory 
to  illustrate  the  properties  of  the  most  important  elements, 
both  metallic  and  non-metallic,  and  their  compounds,  and  it 
is  strongly  recommended  that  a  few  of  these  experiments 
should  be  of  a  quantitative  nature. 


1909-10  Admission  41 

In  addition  to  an  examination  or  certificate  of  examination, 
the  student  will  be  required  to  present  notebooks  of  laboratory 
work.  These  notebooks  must  bear  the  endorsement  of  the 
teacher,  certifying  that  the  notes  are  a  true  record  of  the  stu- 
dent's work,  and  must  be  presented  with  the  certificate  on  or 
before  July  ist,  or  at  the  time  of  the  examination.  In  case 
the  notebook  is  lacking  or  inadequate,  a  laboratory  test  will 
be  given. 

The  final  examination  in  Chemistry  must  be  taken  not  earlier 
than  fifteen  months  before  entrance  in  September,  /.  e.,  for  candi- 
dates entering  in  September,  1910,  not  earlier  than  June,  1909. 

PHYSICS  CI) 

The  requirement  is  met  by  the  course  outlined  in  the  Re- 
port of  the  College  Entrance  Examination  Board,  Document 
No.  4.^.  In  addition  to  an  examination,  or  a  certificate  of  ex- 
amination, the  student  will  be  required  to  present  notebooks 
of  laboratory  work.  These  notebooks  must  be  indexed  and 
bear  the  endorsement  of  the  teacher,  certifying  that  the  no*es 
are  a  true  record  of  the  student's  work,  and  they  must  be  pre- 
sented with  the  certificate  on  or  before  July  ist,  or  at  the  time 
of  the  examination. 

The  final  examination  in  Physics  must  be  taken  not  earlier  than 
fifteen  months  before  entrance  in  September,  i.  e-,  for  candidates 
entering  in  September,  1910,  not  earlier  than  June,  1909. 

ADMISSION  BY  EXAMINATION 

JUNE  EXAMINATIONS 

Candidates  avho  propose  to  enter  by  examination  must  take  all 
examinations  in  June,  except  such  as,  by  permission,  may  be  post- 
poned until  September. 

The  entrance  examinations  conducted  at  Wellesley  College 
in  June  are  the  examinations  of  the"  College  Entrance  Exami- 
nation Board,  of  which  Wellesley  College  is  a  member.  These 
examinations  will  be  held  June  20-25,  1910. 

In  order  to  meet  the  requirements  for  admission  to  Wellesley 


4-2  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

College,  candidates  must  pass  examinations  in  the  following 
subjects,  as  defined  in  the  Documents  issued  by  this  Board  :— 

English  :  a,  b. 
History  *  :  a,  or  c,  or  d. 
Mathematics:  a  (i,  ii),  c. 
Latin  :  1,  b,  c,  m,  and  dq. 

Maximum  Second  Language  : 

Greek  :  a  (i) ,  f ,  b,  g,  and  ch  ; 

or 
French  :  a,  b  ; 

or 
German  :  a,  b. 

Minimum  Third  Language  or  Science  : 
French  :  a ; 

or 
German  :  a ; 

or 
Chemistry ; 

or 
Physics. 

x\ll  applications  for  examination,  and  all  other  inquiries 
must  be  addressed  to  the  Secretary  of  the  College  Entrance 
Examination  Board,  Post  Office  Sub-Station  84,  New  York, 
N.  Y.,  and  must  be  made  upon  a  blank  form  to  be  obtained 
from  the  Secretary  of  the  Board  upon  apphcation. 

A  list  of  places  at  ivhich  the  examinations  are  to  he  held  in  June 
1910,  will  be  published  about  March  ist.  In  order  that  they  may 
receive  proper  consideration,  requests  that  the  examinations  be 
held  at  particular  points  should  be  transmitted  to  the  Secretary  of 
the  Board  not  later  than  February  1st. 

Applications  for  examination  at  points  in  the  United  States  east 
of  the  Mississippi  River  (also  at  Minneapolis,  St.  Louis,  and  other 
points  on  the  Mississippi  River)  must  be  received  by  the  Secretary 
on  or  before  Monday,  June  6,  1910;  applications  for  admission  to 
examination  elsewhere  in  the  United  States  or  in  Canada  must  be 

♦Attention  is  called  to  the  fact  that  the  Board  holds  no  separate  examinations 
in  Greek  and  Roman  History.  Applications  proposing  to  ofter  either  Greek  or 
Roman  History  alone  should  apply  to  the  College  for  permission  to  postpone  this 
examination  until  September. 


1909-10  Admission  43 

received  on  or  before  Monday,  May  30,  1910;  and  applications  for 
examination  at  points  outside  the  United  States  and  Canada  must 
be  received  on  or  before  Monday,  May  16,  1910. 

Applications  received  later  than  the  dates  named  will  be  accepted 
when  it  is  possible  to  arrange  for  the  examination  of  the  candidates 
concerned,  but  only  upon  payment  of  five  dollars  in  addition  to  the 
usual  examination  fee.  Candidates  filing  belated  applications  do 
so  at  their  own  risk. 

The  examination  fee  is  five  dollars  for  all  candidates  examined 
at  points  in  the  United  States  and  Canada,  and  fifteen  dollars  for 
all  candidates  examined  at  points  outside  of  the  United  States  and 
Canada.  The  fee  (which  cannot  be  accepted  in  advance  of  the 
application)  should  be  remitted  by  postal  order,  express  order,  or 
draft  on  New  York  to  the  order  of  the  College  Entrance  Examina- 
tion Board. 

SEPTEMBER    EXAMINATIONS 

Admission  examinations  are  offered  by  the  College  in  Sep- 
tember as  heretofore.  In  general  these  examinations  are  open 
to  those  candidates  only  who  propose  to  enter  the  current 
September. 


SCHEDULE   OF   EXAMINATIONS, 
SEPTEMBER,  1910 

Tuesday,  September  20. 

8.30-12.30  A.  M.  English  Composition  and  Literature. 

2.00-  4.30  P.  xM.  French  (minimum). 

"  German  (minimum). 

"  Greek  (minimum). 

Wednesday,  September  21. 

8.30-10.00  A.  M.  Greek  Grammar. 

10.15-11.45  Greek  Prose  Composition. 

S. 30-12. 00  German  (maximum). 

2.00-  3.00  p.  m.  Anabasis. 

3.00-  4.30  Iliad. 

-2. 00-  5.30  French  (maximum). 


44  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

SCHEDULE  OF  EXAMINATIONS  CContinued) 

Thursday,  September  22. 

8.30-10.30  A.  M.         Algebra. 
10.45-12.30  Plane  Geometry. 

1.30-  3.15  p.  M.         Chemistry,  Physics. 

3-30~  5-3°  History  (Ancient,  American,  English,  Greek. 

Roman) . 

Friday,  September  23. 

5.30-10.00  a.  m.  Cicero. 

i.0.15-11.45  Latin  Prose  Composition. 

2.00-  3.00  p.  M.  Csesar. 

3.00-  4.30  Vergil. 

ADMISSION  BY  CERTIFICATE 

Any  school  whose  equipment  and  curriculum  enable  it  to 
prepare  students  for  the  freshman  class,  upon  complying  with 
the  regulations  stated  below,  may  receive  the  right  to  give  a 
certificate  of  scholarship  which  shall  exempt  the  candidate 
from  college  examinations  for  admission  in  the  subjects  sat- 
isfactorily covered  by  the  certificate. 

RIGHT  OF  CERTIFICATION 

Any  school  in  New  England  desiring  the  right  of  certifica- 
tion should  apply  to  the  Secretary  of  the  New  England  College 
Entrance  Certificate  Board,  Prof.  Nathaniel  F.Davis,  159  Brown 
Street,  Providence,  R.  I.,  before  April  first  of  the  year  in  which 
it  is  proposed  to  make  use  of  the  privilege. 

Any  school  outside  New  England  desiring  the  right  of 
certification  should  apply  to  the  Dean  of  the  College  between 
October  first  and  March  first  of  any  year. 

In  response  to  this  application  a  blank  form  will  be  sent, 
which  the  principal  is  requested  to  fill  out  and  return,  sending 
with  it  a  catalogue  or  circular  of  the  school.  Specimen  labora- 
tory notebooks  must  be  submitted  before  science  courses  will 
be  approved. 


1909-10  Admission  45 

During  the  inten'ai  behveen  March  first  and  October  first 
applications  for  the  right  of  certification  will  not  be  considered 
by  the  Board  of  Examiners. 

In  case  the  credentials  of  the  school  are  approved  by  the 
Board  of  Examiners,  the  right  of  certification  is  given  for 
three  years.  At  the  expiration  of  this  time  the  renewal  of  the 
right  will  depend  upon  the  number  of  students  sent  during  the 
three  years  either  to  Wellesley  College  or  to  some  other  college 
of  equal  rank,  and  upon  the  character  of  the  preparation  of 
these  students  as  shown  by  their  college  record.  The  right 
of  certification  may  be  withdrawn  at  any  time  from  a  school 
which  fails  to  give  complete  and  satisfactory  preparation. 

CERTIFICATE  OF  SCHOLARSHIP 

1.  After  a  school  has  received  the  right  of  certification, 
the  principal  must  present,  upon  a  blank  form  furnished  by  the 
College,  a  certificate  of  scholarship  for  each  candidate.  Cer- 
tificate blanks  will  be  sent  about  April  first  to  the  principals  oi" 
all  accredited  schools  having  candidates  registered  for  the 
current  year. 

2.  These  certificates  and  laboratory  notebooks  must  be  for- 
warded in  time  to  be  received  at  the  College  by  July  first. 
On  or  before  August  first  each  candidate  will  be  informed  of 
the  decision  with  regard  to  her  certificate.  Certificates  re- 
ceived after  July  first  may  be  refused,  and  in  any  case  the 
decision  will  be  necessarily  delayed  to  the  great  disadvantage 
of  the  candidate. 

3.  All  certificates  must  show  distinctly  that  the  candidate 
has  met  in  detail  the  requirements  as  published  in  the  current 
Calendar.  Whenever  any  variation  has  been  allowed,  the 
work  done  must  be  specifically  stated  and  offered  as  an 
equivalent,  to  be  accepted  or  refused.  Attention  is  called  to 
the  division  of  the  admission  subjects  into  Groups  A,  B,  C, 
stated  on  pages  26  and  2y,  and  to  the  fact  that  final  exa?nina- 
tions  in  the  subjects  of  Groups  B  and  C  7?tust  be  taken  within 
a  specified  time  of  admission. 


46  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

4.  All  certificates  must  be  signed  by  the  principal  of  the 
school,  and  countersigned  by  the  assistants  who  have  instructed 
the  candidate. 

5.  Partial  certificates  from  two  accredited  schools  will  not 
be  accepted  for  the  admission  of  a  candidate,  unless  permis- 
sion has  been  obtained  from  the  Board  of  Examiners. 

6.  All  work  completed  after  July  first  must  be  tested  by^ 
examination  at  the  College  in  September.  Certificates  for 
such  work  will  not  be  accepted. 

7.  The  candidate  who  has  received  the  certificate  of  a 
principal  will  not  be  exempt  from  the  examinations  for  admis- 
sion in  any  particular  subject,  unless  her  certificate  shows  that 
she  has  satisfactorily  accomplished  the  full  amount  of  work 
required  in  that  subject.  Any  student  whose  certificate  is 
found  on  July  first  to  be  seriously  deficient,  may  be  refused 
the  privilege  of  taking  examination  the  following  September. 


ADMISSION   TO   ADVANCED   STANDING 

Candidates  for  advanced  standing  must  fulfill  the  require- 
ments for  admission  to  the  freshman  class,  and  must  also  be 
prepared  to  be  examined  in  the  required  studies  previously 
pursued  by  the  class  which  they  wish  to  join,  and  in  a  suffi- 
cient number  of  electives  to  give  full  standing  with  that  class. 

Such  candidates,  if  they  come  from  other  colleges,  may  pre- 
sent certificates  of  college  work,  but  should  clearly  understand 
that  these  do  not  necessarily  exempt  them  from  examinations. 

Each  candidate  should  apply  for  a  statement  of  the  creden- 
tials which  she  will  need  to  present.  These  credentials  are 
due  not  later  than  July  first. 

Candidates  for  advanced  standing  whose  credentials  admit 
them  to  junior  or  higher  rank,  will  take  precedence  of  candi- 
dates for  the  freshman  class  in  the  assignment  of  rooms. 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  the  Dean  of  the 
College. 


1909-10  Admission  47 

ADMISSION    OF    STUDENTS    NOT   CANDIDATES 
FOR    A    DEGREE 

Opportunities  for  special  study  are  offered  to  students  who 
are  not  candidates  for  a  degree,  but  are  qualified  to  undertake 
college  work. 

Applicants  who  give  satisfactory  evidence  of  ability  to  pur- 
sue advanced  courses  of  study  may  be  admitted  at  the  discre- 
tion of  the  Board  of  Examiners,  provided  that  they  satisfy  the 
requirements  of  the  departments  which  they  propose  to  enter. 
It  will  be  noted  that  opportunities  of  prosecuting  work  along 
special  lines  are  thus  open  to  persons  of  experience  and  suc- 
cess in  teaching  who  possess  the  requisite  quahfications  for 
admission  to  college  classes. 

Applicants  of  less  maturity  and  acquirement  are  not  ordi- 
narily admitted,  but  if  such  desire  admission  they  must  expect 
to  meet,  by  examination  or  by  certificate  from  an  accredited 
school,  the  requirements  prescribed  for  admission  to  the  fresh- 
man class,  or  a  full  equivalent  for  them,  and  to  satisfy  such 
additional  requirements  as  are  prescribed  by  the  departments 
which  they  propose  to  enter.  Specific  statements  of  these 
requirements  in  Music  will  be  found  on  page  124  ;  in  Physical 
Education  on  page  103. 

All  courses,  graduate  as  well  as  undergraduate,  are  open  to 
special  students,  subject  to  the  conditions  stated  by  the  various 
departments ;  but  every  such  student  is  expected  to  choose  a 
primary  subject  to  which  she  should  devote  the  greater  part 
of  her  time.  A  student  who  creditably  completes  a  prescribed 
group  of  courses  will  be  granted  a  certificate. 

As  the  capacity  of  halls  of  residence  is  not  sufficient  for 
candidates  for  degrees,  special  students  cannot  be  lodged  in 
the  college  buildings.  Comfortable  homes  may  be  found  in 
the  village  at  about  the  same  expense  as  in  college  houses. 

All  correspondence  should  be  addressed  to  the  Dean  of  the 
College. 


48  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

COURSES    OF    INSTRUCTION 

The  following  Courses  of  Instruction  are  offered  by  the  sev- 
eral departments.  The  College  reserves  the  right  to  withdraw 
the  offer  of  any  course  not  chosen  by  at  least  six  students. 

All  courses  are  classified  in  grades  I,  II,  III ;  grade  I  in- 
cluding elementary  courses  and  grade  III  the  most  advanced 
courses.  The  Roman  numeral  following  the  title  of  a  course 
indicates  the  grade  to  which  it  belongs. 

ART 

PROFESSOR:  ALICE  VAN  VECHTEN  BROWN. 
INSTRUCTORS:  EdITH  ROSE  ABBOT, 

Eliza  Jacobus  Newkirk,  M.A., 
Eben  Fakrington  Comins, 
Elizabeth  Manning  Gardiner,  M.A. 
Curator:  Nancy  May  Pond,  B.S..  B.L.S. 
Assistant  to  the  Curator:  Eloise  Marion  Holton. 

1.  History  of  Architecture.     From  the  Classic  Period  through 

the  Renaissance.     II. 

Open  to  students  vjho  have  completed  either  course  12  or 
jj.      Three  hours  a  xveekfor  a  year. 

Miss  Newkirk. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  a  general  view  of  the 
development  of  styles  and  a  thorough  understanding  of 
their  essential  elements,  both  constructive  and  decorative. 

First  semester :  Introduction  to  the  subject  and  history 
of  Architecture  from  the  Classic  to  the  Gothic  periods. 
Second  semester :  Architecture  of  the  Gothic  and  Renais- 
sance periods. 

Text-book  :  History  of  Architecture,  by  A.  D.  F.  Hamlin. 

2.  Outline  History  of  Greek  Sculpture.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  either  course  i  or  3, 
a7id,  by  permission,  to  students  'vuho  are  taking  course  i  or 
J.      Three  hours  a  zueek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Gardiner. 

Text-book  :  Ha7idbook  of  Greek  Sculpture,  by  Ernest  A. 
Gardner.  In  this  course  the  great  periods  will  be  the  main 
subject  of  study,  and  more  stress  will  be  laid  on  the  spirit 
of  Greek  art  than  upon  archaeological  details. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  49 

3.  History  of  Italian  Painting  through  the  Fifteenth  Cen- 

tury.    I  and  II. 

open  to  freshmen  by  permission^  to  sophomores  andjuniors 
ivithout  prerequisites,,  and  to  students*  already  in  the 
department.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Abbot. 

The  course  for  the  year  1909-1910  will  lay  special  em- 
phasis on  the  qualities  of  composition  and  the  analysis 
of  individual  paintings  for  the  development  of  artistic 
appreciation. 

Subject :  As  introduction,  Early  Christian  and  Byzantine 
Art ;  schools  of  the  thirteenth  and  fourteenth  centuries ; 
Renaissance  movement  from  Masaccio  to  its  culmination. 
Schools  of  Siena,  Umbria,  and  Venice  through  the  fifteenth 
century. 

Syllabus:  Outline  of  Italian  Painting  through  the  Fif- 
teenth Century,  by  William  Rankin. 

4.  Certain  phases  of  Italian  Renaissance  Architecture.     III. 

Open  to  students  -who  have  completed  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Newkirk. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  offer  more  detailed  study  of 
a  special  period,  and  to  give  training  in  the  direction  of 
research  w^ork. 

First  semester :  Introductory  study  of  the  great  domical 
buildings  of  the  Classic  and  Byzantine  styles,  and  detailed 
MTork  on  the  domical  churches  of  the  Italian  Renaissance. 
Second  semester:  Palace  and  Villa  Architecture  of  the 
Renaissance  period  in  Italy. 

10.     History  of  Italian   Painting   during   the  High   Renais- 
sance.    III. 

open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses-  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Professor  Brown. 

In  this  course  critical  study  will  be  given  to  the  position 
and  quality  of  the  following  artists  :  Leonardo,  Michel- 
angelo, Raphael,  Correggio,  Giorgione,  Titian,  Tintoretto, 
and  Veronese.     Critical  and  artistic  study  of  photographs 
*Such  students  will  form  a  division  of  Grade  II. 


50  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

is  required,  and  an  understanding  of  the  methods  used  bj 
Crowe  and  Cavalcaselle,  Morelli,  Berenson,  and  other 
critics. 

13.     Outline  Course  in  the  History  of  Art.     I. 

Open  to  seniors  zvho  have  taken  no  other  history  course 
in  the  Art  Department.  Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 
No  prerequisites. 

Professor  Brown. 

This  course  furnishes  an  outline  of  the  general  develop- 
ment of  styles  in  Architecture,  Sculpture,  and  Painting, 
and  aims  to  give  a  general  knowledge  and  aesthetic 
appreciation  of  important  monuments. 

17.     Outline  Course  in  Mediaeval  and  Renaissance  Sculpture. 
II. 

open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  any 
three-hour  course  of  Grade  II  in  the  department.  One 
hour  a  'week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Gardiner. 

5.      Studio  Practice.     I. 

Open  to  sophomores^  juniors,  and  seniors.  No  pre- 
requisites. One  hour  a  iveek  for  a  year.  {Three  hours 
of  studio  practice.^ 

Miss  Newkirk. 
Drawing,  sketching,  modeling. 

14.     Studio  Practice.     II. 

Open  by  permission  of  the  instructor  to  students  ivho  have 
completed  course  j.  One  hour  a  -week  for  a  year.  ( Three 
hours  of  studio  practice.^ 

First  Semester,  Professor  Brown. 
Second  Semester,  Mr.  Comins. 

First  semester :  drawing,  sketching.     Second  semester  : 
color  work. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  51 

15.  Studio  Practice.     II. 

Open  by  permissio7i  of  the  instructor  to  students  -who  are 
taking  or  have  completed  course  14.  One  hour  a  iveek 
for  a  year.     (  Three  hours  of  studio  practice.^ 

First  Semester,  Miss  Newkirk. 
Second  Semester,  Mr.  Comins. 

First  semester  :  drawing,  sketching.  Second  semester  : 
color  work. 

16.  Studio  Practice.     II. 

Open  by  permission  of  the  instructor  to  juniors  and  sen- 
iors -who  have  completed  course  14.  Two  hours  a  week 
for  a  year.      {Six  hours  of  studio  practice.') 

First  Semester,  Miss  Abbot. 
Second  Semester,  Mr.  Comins. 

First  semester  :  drawing  and  design,  preparatory  to  the 
second  semester's  work.  Second  semester  :  drawing  from 
life;  and  design  at  the  discretion  of  the  instructor. 

Note. — No  studio  course  will  count  toward  the  degree 
until  one  course  in  the  history  of  art  has  been  taken. 
After  one  course  in  the  History  of  Art  has  been  com- 
pleted, three  hours  of  studio  work  as  indicated  in  5,  14, 
15,  16,  above,  equivalent  to  nine  hours  of  studio  practice, 
may  count  toward  the  degree  ;  four  hours  of  studio  work, 
equivalent  to  twelve  hours  of  studio  practice,  may  so 
count,  if  six  hours  in  the  History  of  Art  have  been 
completed. 

Students  in  art  courses  are  required  to  use  laboratory 
methods,  examining  and  comparing,  sketching  or  describ- 
ing, the  photographs  used  in  illustration. 

Previous  preparation  in  drawing  is  not  required. 

The  art  library  is  open  to  students  from  8.15  to  5.30 
daily,  and  from  7.15  to  9.15  in  the  evening. 

N.  B.  Any  student  who  desires  to  give  yearly  the  time  of 
one  full  course  to  studio  work  throughout  her  college  course 
may  do  so  by  spending  five  years  in  college  before  taking  her 
degree,  instead  of  four. 


52  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

ASTRONOMY 

PROFESSORS:   SaRAH    FRANCES   WHITING,   D.Sc, 

Ellen  Hayes,  B.A. 
Assistant  :  Leah  Brown  Allen.  B.A. 
Graduate  Assistants:  Ernestine  Wells  Fuller.  B.A., 
Mary  Wood  Daley,  B.A. 
Curator:  Elizabeth  Phebe  Whiting. 

1.  Physical  Astronomy.     II. 

Ope7i  to  Juniors,  seniors,  ajid  to  sophomores  ivho  have 
completed  Physics  /,  or  aji  equivalefit.  Three  hours  a 
■week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Whiting,  Miss  Allen,  Miss  Fuller. 

A  general  survey  of  present  knowledge  of  the  universe, 
and  of  the  methods  by  which  this  knowledge  has  been 
obtained. 

Special  emphasis  upon  astrophysics.  One  third  of  the 
course  consists  of  observation  of  the  heavens  with  the 
naked  eje  and  equatorial  telescope,  work  with  the  spectro- 
scope, with  the  ephemeris,  charts  and  photographs  of  the 
moon  and  stars. 

2.  General  Astronomy.     II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  Pure  Mathematics 
I.      Three  hours  a  -vueek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hayes,  Miss  Daley. 

This  course  offers  a  systematic  treatment  of  the  funda- 
mental facts  and  principles  relating  to  planetary  and 
stellar  phenomena,  illustrated  and  supplemented  by  prac- 
tical exercises.  Opportunity  is  given  for  work  at  the 
observatory  with  the  clocks  and  equatorial  telescopes. 
Study  of  the  moon  is  continued  throughout  the  year,  and 
an  extended  series  of  naked  eye  observations  is  made  of 
the  positions  of  one  planet. 

1 3.     Practical  Astronomy.     III. 

Open  to  students  vjho  have  completed  course  2,  and  who 
have  completed  or  are  taking  course  i  i?i  Applied  Math- 
ematics.     Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hayes. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  53 

Work  at  the  observatory  with  clock,  chronograph,  sex- 
tant, surveyor's  transit,  prismatic  transit,  equatorial 
telescope. 

Text-book:  Campbell's  Practical  Astronomy. 


4.     Celestial  Mechanics.     Observatory  Work.     III. 

Prttnarily  for  graduate  students  ivho  have  completed 
course  j,  or  an  equivalent.  Three  hours  a  xveek  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Hayes. 

The  course  will  include  the  development  of  the  theory  of 
a  parabolic  orbit,  and  the  determination  of  one  such  orbit, 
with  special  training  in  computing. 

The  practical  work  of  course  3  will  be  continued. 


5.  Elementary  Astrophysics.     III. 

Primarily  for  graduate  students  -who  have  had  at  least 
one  year  of  Astronomy.      Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Whiting. 

The  use  of  instruments  and  consultation  of  original 
memoirs  in  the  study  of  astronomical  spectroscopy,  vari- 
able stars,  the  solar  and  planetary  surface,  measurement 
of  photographic  plates. 

6.  Variable  Stars.     III. 

Open  to  graduate  students  -who  have  completed  or  are 
taking  course  j.      One  hour  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Whiting. 

A  study  of  the  history  and  theories  of  variable  star 
astronomy,  observation  of  variable  stars  with  the  telescope 
and  photographic  plate,  calculation  of  light  curves  and 
periods. 


54  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

BIBI/ICAL    HISTORY,   I.ITERATURE    AND 
INTERPRETATION 

PROFESSOR:    ELIZA    HALL    KENDRICK.    PH.D. 

Associate  Professor:  Adelaide  Imogens  Locke,  B.A.,  S.T.B., 

for  greek  testament: 
Angie  Clara  Chapin,  M.A.,  professor  of  greek. 

INSTRUCTORS:    KATRINE   WHEELOCK,    B.D., 

Eleanor  Densmore  Wood,  B.A. 
I.    Hebrew 

ji.     Elementary  Hebrew.     II. 

Opeti  to  Juniors  and  seniors.      Three  hours  a  -week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Wheelock. 

The  elements  of  Hebrew  grammar,  with  practice  in 
translation  and  the  memorizing  of  a  vocabulary.  David- 
son's I?itroductory  Hebreiv  Graniittar. 

During  the  third  term  reading  of  the  book  of  Ruth  and 
of  stories  selected  from  Genesis,  Judges,  or  I  Samuel. 

At  the  end  of  the  course  the  student  should  be  able  to 
read  simple  Hebrew  and  to  use  the  language  in  the  study 
of  the  Old  Testament. 

II.    Biblical    Historj. 

The  requirement  in  Biblical  History  for  a  degree  is  met 
by  taking  courses  i  or  lo,  and  one  of  the  following  courses  : 
3,  4,  5,  6,  8,  12. 

I.     Studies  in  Hebrew  history  from  the  settlement  of  Canaan 
to  the  Maccabean  Period.     I. 

Required  of  sophomores.      Tivo  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 
Miss  Locke,  Miss  Wheelock. 

lo.     The  Development  of  Thought  in  the  Old  Testament.     I. 

Opeyi  to  sophomores.      Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kendrick. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  this  course  to  offer  studies  in  the 

development  of  thought  in  the  Old  Testament,  as  shown 

in  the  prophetic,  priestly  and  wisdom  literature.     There 

will  be  included  such  historical  study  of  Hebrew  national 

f  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  55 

life  and  such  presentation  of  the  literary  problems  con- 
nected with  the  Old  Testament  writings  as  are  necessary 
to  make  intelligible  the  development  of  Jewish  thought. 

This  course  counts  as  equivalent  to  course  i  and  a  one- 
hour  elective. 

3.  The  Development  of  Thought  in  the  New  Testament.     II. 

Open  to   students   wJio  have   completed  course  i  or  10. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wood. 

It  is  the  purpose  of  this  course  to  offer  studies  in  the 
essential  teachings  of  Christianity  as  represented  by  the 
several  New  Testament  writers.  There  will  be  included 
such  historical  study  of  New  Testament  times  and  such 
presentation  of  the  questions  of  New  Testament  introduc- 
tion as  are  necessary  to  make  intelligible  the  development 
of  Christian  thought. 

4.  Life  of  Christ.     II. 

Open  to  students  -who  have  completed  course   i   or  10. 
Tvjo  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wood. 

Aim:  (i)  To  study  the  environment  of  Christ  in  the 
government,  institutions,  manner  of  life,  ideals  and  litera- 
ture of  the  Jewish  people  of  his  time. 

(2)  To  follow  the  unfolding  of  His  life  from  the  histori- 
cal point  of  view. 

(3)  To  study  the  teachings  of  Christ:  (a)  in  their  his- 
torical connections  as  far  as  possible;   (3)  topically. 

(4)  To  become  acquainted  with  the  leading  problems 
regarding  the  person  and  work  of  Christ,  with  different 
points  of  view,  and  with  the  best  literature  on  the  subject. 

5.  Greek  Testament  I.     Text  study  of  the  Gospels.     II. 

Open   to   stude7its  who   have   completed  course  i  or  10 
a?id  Greek  i.      Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chapin. 

First  semester,  the  synoptic  Gospels ;  second  semester, 
the  Gospel  of  St.  John.     Lectures  and  readings. 


56  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

*  6.     Greek  Testament  II.     Studies  in  the  life  and  literature 

of  the  Apostolic  Age.     II. 

Of>en  to  sfudents  ivko  have  completed  course  i  or  lo  and 
Greek  i.      Two  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chapin. 
Readings  from  the  book  of  Acts,  the  Epistles,  and  the 
early  extra-canonical  literature  in  Greek. 

*  7.     Sources  of  New  Testament  Greek   in   the   Septuagint. 

III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  ^.      One  hour 

a  'week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chapin. 

Quotations  from  the  Old  Testament  in  the  New;  lec- 
tures. Illustrative  readings,  chiefly  from  the  Psalms  in 
Greek. 

8.  The  Life  of  Paul.     II. 

Open  to  students  ivho   have    completed  cotirse  i  or  10. 
Tvjo  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wheelock. 

A  study  of  the  life  and  writings  of  Paul.     The  themes 

treated :  Paul's  environment  and  the  influences  affecting 

him ;  the  facts  of  his  life ;  the  contents  of  his  writings ; 

his  conception  of  Christianity;  his  influence  in  the  church. 

12.     The  Johannine  Literature.     II. 

Open   to  students  ivho    have  completed  course  i  or  10. 
T1V0  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kendrick. 

The  course  is  in  two  parts  : — 

I.  Special.     Exegetical  study  of  the  Fourth  Gospel. 

II.  General.  The  Johannine  literature  as  a  whole. 
The  relation  of  the  Fourth  Gospel  to  the  narrative  of  the 
synoptic  writers,  and  to  the  Christology  of  Paul. 

9.  History  of  Religions.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  tivo  courses  in  Bib- 
lical History.      Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Locke. 
Introductory  study  of  primitive  religions ;  followed  by 
an  outline  comparative  study  of  the  rise  and  development 
of  the  leading  historic  faiths. 
♦Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  57 

BOTANY 

PROFESSOR:  Margaret  Clay  Ferguson,  Ph.D. 
Associate    Professors:  Karl  McKay  Wiegand,  Ph.D., 
Lincoln  Ware  Riddle,  Ph.D. 

INSTRUCTORS:    HENRY   SaXTON    AdAMS,    B.A.S., 

Mary  Campbell  Bliss.  M.A., 
Maude  Cipperly  Wiegand,  B.A., 
Alice  Maria  Ottley,  M.A., 
Laetitia  Morris  Snow,  Ph.D. 

ASSISTANT:    EmiLY    PAULINE    LOCKE,    M.A- 
CURATOR:    MABEL  ANNIE   StONE,    B.A. 

Laboratory  ASSISTANT:  Mary  Adeline  Stevens. 


5.     Plant  Studies.     I. 

open  to  freshmen  and  sophomores.  Three  hours  a  -week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Ferguson,  Miss  Bliss,  Mrs.  Wiegand, 
Miss  Ottley,  Miss  Snow. 

This  course  is  designed  to  bring  the  student  into  sym- 
pathy with  the  plant  world,  to  cultivate  the  power  of 
careful  observation,  to  give  a  knowledge  of  the  funda- 
mental principles  of  plant  life  and  plant  breeding.  The 
structure  and  development  of  certain  plants  are  studied 
from  seed  germination  to  fruit  formation,  and  the  more 
simple  problems  connected  with  the  adjustment  of  plants 
to  their  surroundings  are  investigated.  Students  are 
trained  to  know  the  herbaceous  plants  in  their  spring 
condition,  to  recognize  the  early  flowers,  and  to  know 
our  common  trees  both  in  their  winter  and  in  their  sum- 
mer aspect. 

I.     General  Botany.     II. 

Opefi  to  Juniors  and  sejtiors,  and  to  sophomores  -who  have 
completed  course  5,  or  its  equivalent.  Three  hours  a 
iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Ferguson,  Mr.  Wiegand, 
Mr.  Riddle,  Miss  Bliss. 

This  course  treats  of  plant  structures,  plant  physiology, 
the  relation  of  plants  to  their  environment,  and  the  evolu- 


58  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

tion    of   the  plant   kingdom.     A  certain  amount  of  field 
work  accompanies  the  laboratory  studies. 

2.  Taxonomy  of  the  Algae,  Bryophytes,and  Pteridophytes.  III. 

open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.      Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Riddle. 

A  critical  study  of  the  structure  and  development  of  the 
Algge,  and  of  the  taxonomy  of  Algge,  Liverworts,  Mosses, 
and  Ferns,  with  practical  experience  in  the  collection  and 
determination  of  these  plants. 

3.  Taxonomy  and  Geographical  Distribution  of  the  Phaner- 

ogams.    III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.      Three 
hotcrs  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Wiegand. 

A  study  of  the  genetic  relationships  and  distribution  of 
flowering  plants  conducted  both  in  the  laboratory  and  in 
the  field.  The  course  aims  to  give  the  student  an  ac- 
quaintance with  the  local  flora,  and  independence  in  the 
determination  of  plants  by  the  use  of  manuals  and  keys. 

4.  Bacteriology  and  Mycology.     II. 

Opeti  to  students  xvho  have  completed  course  ^.      Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Riddle. 

This  course  deals  with  the  bacteria  and  the  fungi,  with 

special  reference  to  the  economic  relations  of  these  plants. 

7.     Plant  Problems.     III. 

open  to  graduate  studeyits.      Three  or  six  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Ferguson,  Mr.  Wiegand,  Mr.  Riddle. 
This    is    primarily   a    laboratory   course,  but  a    definite 
weekly  appointment  is  made  with  each  student  for  a  re- 
port of  the  papers  read  and  of  the  progress  of  her  study, 
and  a  final  paper  or  thesis  embodying  the  results  of  her 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  59 

investigations  is  required.  A  special  problem  in  one  of 
the  following  subjects  is  assigned  to  each  student :  embry- 
ology, histology,  physiology,  ecology,  taxonomy. 

12.  Horticulture  and  Landscape  Gardening.     II. 

Open  to  students  -who  have  completed  courses  ^  and  i,  or 
their  equivalent^  andy  with  the  approval  of  the  depart- 
ment, to  seniors  ivho  have  cotnpleted  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  -week  for  a  year, 

Mr.  Adams. 

This  course  aims  to  cultivate  the  appreciation  of  outdoor 
art,  and  at  the  same  time  to  give  such  a  knowledge  of  the 
cultivated  plants  and  of  the  art  and  science  of  horticulture 
and  landscape  gardening  as  will  enable  the  student  to 
carry  on  gardening  for  pleasure  or  profit,  and  also  to  act 
as  director  of  school  and  municipal  gardens. 

13.  Comparative  Morphology,  Histology,  and  Embryology. 

III. 

Ope7i  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  cojupleted  course 
I.      Three  hours  a  week  for  the  year. 

Miss  Ferguson,  Miss  Locke. 

Preliminary  studies  of  the  structure,  development,  and 
contents  of  the  vegetable  cell,  nuclear  and  cell  division, 
tissue  formation.  Especial  emphasis  is  placed  on  tracing 
the  development  and  homologies  of  sporogenous,  repro- 
ductive, and  embryological  organs,  and  on  the  problems 
of  evolution  and  inheritance.  In  connection  with  these 
studies,  practical  exercises  are  given  in  the  most  approved 
methods  of  cytological  and  histological  technique. 

14.  Botanical  Seminary.     HI. 

Required  of  graduate  students,  and  open  to  seiiiors  by 
permission.      One  hour  a  week  for  the  year. 

Miss  Ferguson. 

Readings  and  discussions  of  current  literature ;  reports 
of  problems  under  investigation  ;  studies  in  the  historical 
development  of  some  phase  of  botanical  knowledge. 


60  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

CHEMISTRY 

PROFESSOR:    CHARLOTTE    FiTCH    ROBERTS.    PH.D. 

Associate  Professor:  Charlotte  Almira  Bragg,  B.S. 

instructor:  george  arthur  goodell.  m.a. 

Assistants:  Helen  Somersby  French,  B.A.. 

Lucy  Middleton  Griscom,  M.S. 

Curator:  Mary  Marian  Fuller. 

1.  General  Chemistry.     Lectures  and  laboratory  work.     I. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates .      Three  hours  a  -week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Bragg. 

Course  i  is  for  beginners  in  Chemistry,  and  is  intended 
to  familiarize  the  student  with  the  important  properties  of 
the  elements  and  their  compounds,  with  their  modes  of 
preparation,  and  with  such  tests  as  shall  lead  up  to  the 
study  of  systematic  Qualitative  Analysis ;  also  to  present 
the  laws  governing  chemical  reactions,  the  meaning  of 
chemical  equations,  and  the  more  recent  theories  adopted 
in  the  science. 

2.  Qualitative  Analysis.     II. 

Open  to  studetits  who  have   completed   course   i    or  4. 
Three  hours  a  %veek  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Goodell. 

This  course  supplements  course  i  by  presenting  more  in 
detail  the  properties  and  characteristic  reactions  of  the 
metallic  elements.  Practical  methods  of  separating  and 
recognizing  the  elements  present  in  mixtures  are  taught, 
and  the  progress  of  the  student  is  constantly  tested  by  the 
examination  of  substances,  the  composition  of  which  is 
unknown  to  the  student. 

4.     Advanced  General  Chemistry.     I. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  admission  require- 
ment  or  its  equivalent.      Three  hours  a  rveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Roberts,  Miss  French. 

The  course  aims  to  give  a  thorough  knowledge  of  the 

fundamental  principles  of  the  science,  and  to  take  up,  so 

far  as  time  allows,  subjects  of  interest  and  importance  in 

daily  life. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  61 

5.     Quantitative  Analysis.     II. 

Opett  to  students  -who  have  completed  course  2.      Three 
hours  a  'week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Goodell. 

In  this  course  a  few  typical  processes  involving  both 
volumetric  and  gravimetric  methods  are  taught,  to  illus- 
trate the  general  principles  of  Quantitative  Analysis. 

t  6.     Air,  Water,  and  Food  Analysis.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  /,  ^,  5,  and 
y.      Three  hours  a  iveek  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Bragg. 

7.  Organic  Chemistry,  with  laboratory  work  in  organic  prep- 

arations.    III. 

Ope7t  to  Juniors  and  seniors  vjho  have  co?npleted  or  are 
takitig  course  2.      Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Roberts,  Miss  French. 

8.  Theoretical  Chemistry.     III. 

Ope?i  to  seniors  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course 
7.      Three  hours  a  week  for  the  secotid  semester. 

Miss  Roberts. 

9.  Selected  Subjects  in  Theoretical  and  Physical  Chemistry, 

with  laboratory  work  in  the  determination  of  vapor 
densities  and  molecular  weights.     III. 

Opeji  to  seniors  and  graduates  who  have  completed  or 
are  takiitg  course  8.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  semester. 

Miss  Roberts. 

10.  Advanced  Laboratory  Course  :  Special  Work  in  Organic 

Preparations,  or  Problems  of  Food  Analysis,  or  Ad- 
vanced Analytical  Chemistry.     III. 
Open  to  se?iiors  and  gradtcates.      Three  hours  a  week  for 
a  semester. 

Miss  Roberts. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 


62  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

The  subject  treated  each  year  is  arranged  on  consulta- 
tion with  the  department. 

Courses  9  and  10  will  not  ordinarily  be  given  the  same 
year. 

til.     Historical  Chemistry.     II. 

Ope7i  to  students  -who  have  completed  course  i  or  4.    Three 
hours  a  xveek  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Roberts. 

This  course  treats  of  the  beginnings  of  Chemistry,  and 

its  development  to  modern  times.     It  includes  a  study  of 

the  work  of  the  alchemists,  and  of  the  lives  and  discoveries 

of  the  more  prominent  founders  of  the  science. 

12.     Elementary  Inorganic  Chemistry. 

Opeti  only  to  students  in  the   Department  of  Physical 
Education.      Three  hours  a  "week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Goodell. 

The  course  deals  with  the  most  common  of  the  elements, 

and,  although  it  is  largely  descriptive  in  its  character,  the 

fundamental  principles  of  Chemistry  are  emphasized  and 

illustrated  both  in  the  lectures  and  laboratory  work. 

ECONOMICS  AND   SOCIOLOGY 

Professor:  Katharine  Coman,  Ph.B. 
Associate  Professor:  Emily  Greene  Balch.  B.A, 
Instructor  :  Anna  Youngman,  Ph.D. 

I.     Elements  of  Economics.    I. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors,  but  intended 

primarily  for  sophomores.      Two  hours  a  -week  for  the 

year. 

Miss  Youngman. 

An  introductory  course  designed  to  give  the  student  ac- 
quaintance with  economic  facts  and  training  in  economic 
reasoning.  Illustrations  will  be  drawn  from  actual  obser- 
vation of  the  conditions  determining  prices,  land  values, 
wages,  profits,  and  standards  of  living.  In  the  second  se- 
mester, certain  legislative  problems  relating  to  currency, 
banking,  the  tariff,  etc.,  will  be  discussed  in  class, 
f  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  63 

2.     Industrial  History  of  the  United  States.     III. 

Open  to  Juniors  and  seniors  tvho  have  completed  one 
cotcrse  in  Economics.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Coman. 

A  study  of  our  national  development  in  its  material  and 
social  aspects,  accompanied  by  a  critical  review  of  eco- 
nomic legislation.  Coman's  I?idustrial  History  of  the 
Utiited  States  will  serve  as  a  guide  in  class  discussion. 
Each  student  will  undertake  to  investigate  a  special  phase 
of  the  general  subject,  and  will  submit  two  final  papers, 
one  in  February  and  one  in  June,  representing  about  half 
the  working  time  required  by  the  course. 

*  3.     Industrial  History  of  England  II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  course 
I  or  75.      Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Balch. 

A  study  of  the  evolution  of  industrial  forms,  more  espe- 
cially of  villeinage,  gilds,  domestic  manufacture,  the  fac- 
tory system,  capitalist  farming,  and  modern  commerce. 
Each  student  will  be  expected  to  submit  a  final  paper  dis- 
cussing some  nineteenth  century  problem. 

4.     Socialism.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  one 
course  in  Economics.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester* 

Miss  Balch. 

A  critical  study  of  modern  socialism,  including  the  main 
theories  and  political  movements.  Special  attention  will 
be  given  to  Karl  Marx,  and  selected  parts  of  Capital  will 
be  read  by  the  class.  A  reading  knowledge  of  French 
and  German  is  desirable  but  not  indispensable. 

*5.     Statistical  Study  of  Certain  Economic  Problems.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
courses  in  Economics.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Youngman. 

*  Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


64  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

The  course  is  introduced  bv  lectures  on  the  principles  of 
statistical  research.  Each  member  of  the  class  undertakes 
the  investigation  of  a  particular  problem,  and  reports  the 
results  of  her  inquiry  in  the  form  of  a  final  paper.  Em- 
phasis is  placed  upon  the  critical  examination  of  statistical 
methods. 

6.  Social  Economics  I.     III. 

Open  to  Juniors  and  setnors  who  have  completed  one 
course  i?i  Ecotiomics.  Three  hours  a  iveek  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Balch. 

A  study  of  the  dependent,  defective,  and  delinquent 
classes,  accompanied  by  discussion  of  methods  of  dealing 
with  each.  The  class  will  make  four  or  five  visits  to 
designated  institutions,  and  each  student  will  undertake 
the  study  of  some  special  problem  which  will  be  discussed 
in  a  final  paper. 

7.  Social  Economics  II.     III. 

Open  to  jtcniors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  one 
course  i?i  Eco7iomics.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Balch. 

A  discussion  of  methods  of  meeting  certain  normal 
social  needs,  such  as  housing,  sanitation,  education,  and 
recreation,  accompanied  by  a  critical  discussion  of  the 
principles  and  actual  boundaries  of  self-help  and  collective 
action.  The  North  End  of  Boston  is  used  as  a  field  of 
observation.  The  arrangement  of  excursions  is  similar 
to  that  in  course  6. 

*  8.     Labor  Movement  in  the  Nineteenth  Century.     II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  i  or  ivho  have  cofupleted  course  /j.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Balch. 

A  critical  study  of  labor  organizations  in  their  historical 

and    economic    aspects.      The   origins   of   trade   unions, 

recent   legislation,    important   judicial  decisions    relating 

*Not  offered  in  1909-1910, 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  65 

to  labor  combinations,  and  the  present  status  of  trade 
unionism  in  England  and  in  America  will  be  discussed. 
Important  features  of  trade  union  policy,  such  as  collective 
bargaining,  the  standard  rate,  the  "closed  shop,"  the 
alleged  restrictions  of  output  will  be  studied  in  their  effects 
on  industry,  on  the  consumer,  and  on  the  working  classes. 

*  9.     An  Introduction  to  General  Sociology.     III. 

open  to  juniors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  two 
courses  in  Economics.      Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Balch. 

A  study  of  facts  and  theories  of  social  development,  and 
more  especially  of  the  growth  of  institutions,  such  as  the 
family,  the  state,  law,  and  property. 

10.     Immigration.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  one 
course  in  Economics.  Three  hours  a  xveek  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Balch. 

A  study  of  immigration  into  the  United  States,  the  race 
elements  represented,  and  their  geographical  distribution, 
the  social,  political,  and  economic  influence  of  our  foreign 
populations,  the  history  of  restrictive  legislation,  and 
the  arrangements  thus  far  provided  for  the  reception  and 
care  of  aliens.  Each  student  will  submit  a  final  paper  on 
some  special  phase  of  the  subject. 

12.     The  Trust  Problem.     III. 

Open  to  juniors   and  seniors  ivho   have   completed  one 

course  in  Economics.      Three  hours  a  iveek  for  the  second 

semester. 

Miss  Youngman. 

This  course  will  deal  with  the  various  forms  of  monop- 
olistic organization,  the  growth  of  large  scale  production, 
the  history  of  characteristic  combinations,  legislation  and 
judicial  decisions  relating  to  the  subject,  the  alleged  ad- 
vantages and  evils  of  trusts,  and  proposed  remedies  for 
the  latter.  Each  student  will  be  required  to  submit  a 
paper  representing  the  result  of  her  study  of  one  of  the 
great  combinations. 
♦Not  offered  in  1909-IQ10. 


66  -  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

13.  Selected  Industries,     I. 

Of  en  to  sophomores^  juniors^  arid  seniors.  One  hour  a 
vjeek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Youngman. 

The  subject  for  1909- 19 10  will  be  the  two  leading  textile 
industries.  The  early  history  of  cotton  and  woolen  manu- 
facture, the  introduction  of  machinery  and  the  develop- 
ment of  the  factory  system,  contrasts  between  the  American 
and  English  systems,  the  localization  of  the  industry  in  the 
North,  and  its  later  rise  in  the  South,  labor  problems— the 
employment  of  children,  the  immigrant,  trade  unionism, 
and   factory  legislation   will  be  considered. 

This  course  taken  alone  will  not  serve  as  a  prerequisite. 

14.  Municipal  Socialism.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
courses  in  Economics.  Three  hours  a  xveek  for  the 
second  semester. 

Miss  Coman. 

This  course  is  designed  to  follow  course  4  and  proposes 
a  review  of  actual  experiments,  English,  German,  and 
American,  in  the  way  of  municipalization  of  public  service 
agencies.  The  legitimate  relations  between  public  and 
private  corporations,  the  necessary  limitations  on  fran- 
chises and  other  concessions,  and  the  results  of  foreign 
experience  are  discussed.  To  each  student  is  assigned  for 
individual  study  an  important  American  city. 

15.  History  of  Economic  Theory.     II. 

open  to  Juniors  and  seniors.  Three  hours  a  tveek  for  the 
first  semester. 

Miss  Coman. 

A  discussion  of  economic  theory  as  determined  by 
industrial  and  political  environment.  The  teachings  of 
Plato  and  Aristotle,  the  canons  of  the  schoolmen,  the 
tenets  of  the  mercantilist,  physiocratic  and  laissez-faire 
schools,  are  treated  in  the  light  of  contemporary  industrial 
conditions.  More  recent  modifications  in  economic  ideas 
are  also  noted. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  67 

1 6.  Money  and  Banking.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  one 
course  in  Economics.  Three  hours  a  -week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Youngman. 

The  course  deals  mainly  with  the  principles  of  money 
and  banking,  but  it  is  also  designed  to  give  the  student 
some  acquaintance  with  the  history  and  chief  characteris- 
tics of  typical  modern  systems  of  banking. 

17.  Economics  of  Consumption.     III. 

Open  to  juniors   and  seniors  -who  have   completed  ttuo 

courses  in  Economics.      Three  hours  a  week  for  the  jtrst 

semester. 

Miss  Balch. 

This  course  will  deal  with  both  theoretical  and  practical 
aspects  of  the  use  of  wealth.  Some  or  all  of  the  following 
topics  will  be  discussed  :  the  division  of  public  and  private 
incomes  between  use  as  capital  and  use  for  immediate  con- 
sumption (functions  and  limits  of  saving),  "  Engel's  law," 
standards  of  living,  workingmen's  budgets  and  the  mini- 
mum wage,  Veblen's  theory  of  conspicuous  consumption, 
the  role  and  social  limits  of  luxury,  final  utility  and  its  re- 
lation to  expenditure.  The  function  of  women  in  directing 
household  expenditure  will  be  considered  throughout. 

18.  Conservation  of  our  Natural  Resources.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two 
courses  in  the  department.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the 
second  semester. 

Miss  Coman. 

A  consideration  of  the  wastes  involved  in  the  exploita- 
tion of  forests,  mineral  resources,  soil  and  water  power, 
and  the  means  proposed  for  scientific  conservation. 
The  work  of  the  Department  of  Agriculture,  the  Bureau  of 
Forestry,  the  Reclamation  Service,  the  Bureau  of  Mines, 
etc.,  will  be  studied  in  detail,  and  their  several  achieve- 
ments will  furnish  subjects  for  final  papers. 


68  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

KDUCATION 

PROFESSOR:   ANNA   JANE    McKEAG.    PH.D. 

Graduate  Assistant:  Frances  Raymond  Hill,  B.A. 

2.     History  of  Education.     Educational  theories.     II. 

open  to  juniors  and  seniors.      Three  hours  a  -week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  McKeag. 

This  course  aims  to  present  a  general  view  of  the  great 
movements  in  education,  to  trace  the  development  of  its 
institutions,  and  to  select  characteristic  features  of  its 
accepted  systems.  Emphasis  is  placed  on  modern  educa- 
tional theories. 

I.     Science  of  Education.     II. 

Open  to  seniors  who  have  completed  the  requirement  in 
Philosophy.      Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  McKeag. 

This  course  attempts  to  base  principles  of  education 
upon  the  data  of  science.  It  includes,  among  the  topics 
presented,  the  educative  influence  of  primitive  arts  and 
industries,  school  hygiene,  educational  processes  at  various 
stages  of  the  child's  development,  and  educative  material 
suitable  at  different  periods  of  the  child's  life. 

*  3.     Introduction  to  Experimental  Pedagogy.     II. 

Open  to  seniors  xvho  have  completed  the  requirement  in 
Philosophy  a?id  to  graduates.  Tivo  hours  a  iveek  for  a 
year. 

Miss  McKeag. 

A  brief  survey  of  the  results  of  experimentation  in  the 
field  of  education.  A  study  of  effective  methods  of  inves- 
tigation. Written  reports  of  statistical  and  experimental 
inquiries. 

*  Xot  offered  in  iQog-igio. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  69 

4.  Secondary  Education.     III. 

Open  to  graduates  who  have  completed  course  i  or  course 
2.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  McKeag. 

This  course  aims  to  present  the  history  and  principles 
of  secondary  education,  with  especial  reference  to  the 
American  High  School.  A  study  will  be  made  of  approved 
methods  of  teaching  English,  foreign  languages,  sciences, 
mathematics,  and  history  in  high  schools.  Opportunity 
will  be  given  for  observation  of  the  work  of  especially  suc- 
cessful high  school  teachers  in  the  subject  which  the 
student  expects  to  teach. 

In  connection  with  this  course,  the  Department  of  Edu- 
cation will  arrange  for  a  certain  amount  of  systematic 
Practice  Teaching,  to  be  done  as  independent  work,  under 
the  guidance  of  the  department. 

5.  Principles  of  Education  based  on  Psychology.     I. 

Open  only  to  students  in  the  Department  of  Physical 
Education.      Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  McKeag. 

This  course  includes  a  survey  of  important  educational 
theories  and  of  the  psychological  basis  of  education,  with 
special  reference  to  the  problems  of  the  modern  school. 

*8.     Philosophy  and  Art  of  Teaching.     III. 

Open,  on  the  approval  of  the  department^  to  graduates 
who  have  completed  course  i  or  2.  Two  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  McKeag. 

This  course  attempts  to  present  both  the  philosophy  and 
the  art  of  instruction.  It  considers  the  nature  and  ele- 
ments of  the  teaching  process ;  aims  and  ideals  in  school- 
room practices,  and  the  basis  of  methodology.  It  examines 
in  some  detail  the  art  of  study,  and  briefly  considers 
discipline  and  incentives. 


*Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


Wellesley  College  1909-10 

ELOCUTION 

Associate  Professor:   Malvina  Bennett,  Ph.B. 


Training  of  the  Body  and  Voice.     I. 

open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.      Tivo  hours  a 
week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bennett. 

Body;  poise  and  bearing.  Voice,  articulation.  Text- 
book: YAn^^  Graduated  Exercises  in  Articulation.  Read- 
ing with  special  reference  to  a  good  use  of  the  voice  and 
clear,  direct  giving  of  the  thought.     Recitations. 


2.     Training  of  the  Body  and  Voice.     Expression.     II. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  i,  or  a?i 
equivalent.      Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bennett. 

Voice  culture ;  exercises  for  freedom  of  the  body ;  ges- 
ture ;  recitations  from  the  best  authors ;  reading  at  sight. 

The  w^ork  is  along  the  lines  of  course  i,  only  much  more 
advanced. 


3.     Reading  of  Shakespeare.     II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  2,  or 
to  those  who  have  completed  or  are  taking  English  Lit- 
erature g ;  to  others  at  the  discretion  of  the  instructor. 

T'lVO  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bennett. 

Analysis  of  characters ;  reading ;  scenes  selected  for 
memorizing  and  acting.     Two  plays  studied. 

This  course  does  not  count  as  a  separate  subject  when 
elected  with  English  Literature  9. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  71 

ENGI.ISH 

I.    Knglish  Literature 

PROFESSOR:  KATHARINE  LEE  BATES.  M.A. 

Associate  Professors:  Vida  Dutton  Scudder.  M.A., 

*  Sophie  Jewett, 

If  Margaret  Pollock  Sherwood,  Ph.D., 
Alice  Vinton  Waite,  M.A., 
Laura  Emma   Lockwood,  Ph.D., 

t  Martha  Hale  Shackford,  Ph.D., 
Charles  Lowell  Young.  B.A. 

INSTRUCTORS:    t  MARY   BOWEN   BrAINERD.    PH.D., 

Adele  Lathrop,  M.A. 
ASSISTANTS:  Florence  Converse,  M.A., 

Harriet  Manning  Blake,  B.A. 

READER:   ANNA   CaBOT   AlMY.    B.A. 

Graduate  Assistants:  Florence  Risley.  B.A., 
Adelaide  Haley,  B.A. 

1.  Outline  History  of  English  Literature.     I. 

Ope7t  to  freshmen,  sophomores.,  ayid  juniors.  Three  hours 
a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lathrop,  Miss  Blake,  and  Miss  Almy. 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  a  general 
survey  of  English  literature  and  to  prepare  the  way  for 
more  specialized  work.  The  course  is  conducted  by  lec- 
tures and  by  critical  studj^  of  selected  masterpieces. 

A  syllabus  of  the  historical  work  is  sold  by  the 
department. 

2.  American  Authors.     IL 

Open  to  students  zvho  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  /,  and  to  all  seniors.  Three  hours  a  -week  for  a 
year. 

Mr.  Young. 

This  course  will  attempt  to  give  a  comprehensive  ac- 
count of  American  literature.  After  a  brief  introductory 
study  of  the  Colonial  and  Revolutionary  background,  the 

♦Died  October  ii,  1Q09. 

IT  Absent  on  leave. 

\  Absent  on  leave  for  the  first  semester. 

t  During  the  first  semester. 


Wellesley  College  1909-10 

class  will  read  in  turn:  (i)  the  literature  of  the  Middle 
States;  (2)  of  New  England;  (3)  of  the  country  at  large 
since  the  Civil  War,  especially  the  South  and  the  West. 
Stress  will  be  laid  in  class  room  on  the  following  writers  : 
Cooper,  Poe,  Hawthorne,  Holmes,  Emerson,  Thoreau, 
Lowell,  Lincoln,  and  Walt  Whitman. 


3.  English  Lyric  Poetry.     II. 

open  to   students   ivho   have   completed  or   are   taking 
course  i.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lathrop. 

This  course  will  include  studies  of  various  lyric  forms. 
Close  attention  will  be  given  to  Elizabethan  songs  and 
sonnets,  with  comparative  work  in  earlier  and  later  lyrics. 

4.  Milton.     II. 

open    to  students   who   have    completed  or   are    taking 
course  /.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lockwood. 

The  primary  object  of  this  course  is  the  critical  study 
of  Milton  as  a  master  in  lyric,  epic,  and  dramatic  poetry, 
and  as  a  writer  of  notable  prose.  The  character  and  genius 
of  the  poet  are  considered  as  influenced  by  the  political 
and  religious  conflict  of  the  times.  Special  emphasis  is 
placed  on  the  comparison  of  Milton's  work  with  that  of 
other  great  writers  who  have  used  the  same  literary  forms. 

5.  English    Prose,   exclusive    of    Fiction,    from    Sidney   to 

Carlyle.     II. 

Open    to   students   zuho   have   completed  or   are   taking 
course  i .      Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lathrop. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  trace  the  development  of 
English  prose  style,  to  examine  the  chief  prose  forms  per- 
fected, and  to  study  the  personality  and  influence  of  each 
of  the  more  important  writers. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  73 

6.     Victorian  Prose.     III. 

Ofen  to  students  -who  have  completed  course  i  or  course 
8,  and  -who  have  completed  or  are  taking  a  second  course. 
Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scudder. 

This  course  will  deal  especially  with  Dickens,  Thackeray, 
George  Eliot,  Carlyle,  Newman,  Ruskin,  and  Arnold.  At- 
tention will  also  be  given  to  the  historical  background, 
and  to  the  work  of  minor  men. 


7.     English  Poetry  of  the  Nineteenth  Century.     III. 

Of  en  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  i  or  course 
8,  and  vjho  have  completed  or  are  taking  a  second  course. 
Three  hours  a  zveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scudder  (first  semester). 
Miss  Shackford  (second  semester). 

This  course  considers  the  work  of  the  great  Georgian 
and  Victorian  poets  in  their  relation  to  one  another  and  to 
contemporary  movements,  political,  social,  ethical,  and 
aesthetic.  Extended  study  is  given  to  Wordsworth  and 
Coleridge;  Shelley  and  Keats;  Tennyson  and  Browning; 
with  briefer  readings  from  Byron,  Scott,  and  Landor ; 
Clough  and  Arnold  ;  Rossetti,  Morris,  and  Swinburne. 


English  Literature  of  the  Fourteenth  Century.     II. 

Ofett    to   students    ivho    have    completed   or   are    taking 
course  i.      Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Brainerd  (first  semester). 
Miss  Shackford  (second  semester). 

This  course  will  include  a  chronological  study  of  the 
major  portion  of  Chaucer's  work.  Attention  will  be  given 
to  Chaucer's  chief  French  and  Italian  sources,  to  contem- 
porary English  literature  and  social  conditions.  Special 
study  will  be  put  upon  Langland's  Piers  Plowman  and 
upon  The  Pearl. 


74  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

9.     English  Drama  through  Shakespeare.     III. 

open  to  studetits  -who  have  completed  course  8,  and  also 
to  students  -who  have  completed  course  i,  and  -who  have 
taken  or  are  taking  a  second  course.  Three  hours  a 
-week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bates. 

This  course  attempts  to  trace  the  dramatic  evolution 
from  the  Easter  Mystery  to  Shakespeare,  to  observe  the 
structure  and  artistic  principles  of  the  Elizabethan  drama, 
and  to  study  closely  a  few  of  Shakespeare's  plays,  with 
reading  and  discussion  of  the  others.  A  syllabus  sold  by 
the  department  furnishes  bibliographical  data  for  the  work. 


10.     Historical  Development  of  English  Literature.     III. 

Open  to  studettts  who  have  completed  courses  8  and  9, 
and  have  completed  or  are  taking  course  6  or  course  7. 
Three  hours  a  xveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scudder. 

This  course  follows  the  development  of  English  Litera- 
ture from  the  earliest  times  to  the  present.  It  is  designed 
to  supplement  the  more  detailed  courses  already  taken  by 
a  general  survey  which  shall  reveal  causes  and  relations. 


*ii.     Modern  Authors.     III. 

Primarily  ijitended  for  graduate  students.  Open  to 
seniors  only  by  special  permission .  Three  hours  a  xi'eek 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Scudder. 

Two  significant  authors  are  chosen  each  year  for  close 
and  comprehensive  study.  The  authors  considered  in  1901- 
1902  were  Ruskin  and  Morris  ;  in  1903-1904  Wordsworth 
and  Coleridge;  in  1904-1905  Rossetti  and  Swinburne:  in 
1906-1907  Shelley  and  Browning. 


*  Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  75 

12.     Critical  Problems  of   the  Literature  of  the  Fourteenth 
Century.     III. 

Open  to  graduates  atid  to  approved  sejiiors  w/io  have 
completed  two  earlier  courses  in  the  department.  Three 
hours  a  -vjeek  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Brainerd  (first  semester). 
Miss  Shackford  (second  semester). 
This  course  aims  to  introduce  students  to  some  of  the 
more  important  problems  in  the  literature  of  Chaucer  and 
of  his  contemporaries.  Special  effort  will  be  made  to  in- 
vestigate the  differentiation  of  literary  types  in  this  era ; 
the  development  of  the  resources  of  the  language ;  the 
influence  of  foreign  writers,  operative  in  England  ;  and 
some  of  the  vital  questions  of  textual  criticism. 

*  1 3.     Social  Ideals  in  English  Letters.     I. 

Open  to  all  students  except  freshmen.      One  hour  a  tveek 

for  a  year. 

Miss  Scudder. 

This  course  will  trace  the  development  of  social  thought 
in  modern  English  Literature.  Emphasis  will  be  put  upon 
the  poets  of  the  Revolutionary  period. 

14.     English  Masterpieces.     II. 

open  only  to  seniors  ivho  have  completed  no  full  course 
in  English  Literature,  or  course  i  ojily.      Three  hours  a 

xveek  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Young. 

This  course  is  intended  to  develop  a  sympathetic  appre- 
ciation of  literature  through  the  study  of  chosen  master- 
pieces. 

*  17.     Development  of  English  Prose  Fiction  to  1830.     I. 

Open  to  all  students  except  freshmen.  One  hour  a  rveek 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Sherwood. 

The   work    will    extend    from    the    chivalric    romance 
through    the     sixteenth-century    experiments    with     new 
*  Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


76  Wellesi.ey  College  1909-10 

types,  and  the  eighteenth-century  development  of  the 
novel,  to  selected  masterpieces  of  Jane  Austen  and  of 
Scott. 

*  1 8.     The  British  Ballad.     II. 

Of  en    to   students  who  have    completed   or  are   taking 
course  i.      Two  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Jewett. 

This  course  will  consist  of  a  study  of  the  English  and 
Scottish  popular  ballads,  and  of  the  modern  literary  ballad 
from  Scott  to  Stevenson. 

19.     Metrics.     II. 

Open  to  all  students  except  freshmen.      One  hour  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Waite. 

This  course  will  consist  of  a  series  of  lectures  on  the 
principles  of  metrical  form,  intended  to  guide  the  student 
of  literature  to  a  better  appreciation  of  poetic  expression. 
The  lectures  will  be  accompanied  by  class  readings  and 
class  analyses  of  verse  and  stanza. 

*  20.     The  Poetry  of  Spenser.     II. 

open  to  students  who  have  taken  or  are  taking  course  i. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  seco?id  semester. 
This    course   includes    the   greater   part   of   the  Faerie 
^ueejie  and  all  the  minor  poetry  of  Spenser. 

21.     Introduction  to  Arthurian  Romance.     II. 

Open    to   students  who  have    completed   or  are   taking 
course  i.      One  hour  a  xveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Scudder. 

This  course  will  open  with   Malory's  Morte  Darthur^ 
and  thence  work  back  to  a  study  of  certain  earlier  forms 
of    Arthurian    romance.      The    Grail-Cycle   will    receive 
especial  attention. 
*Not  offered  in  190Q-IQ10. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  77 

*22.     English  Romanticism.     III. 

open  to  graduates  and  to  approved  seniors  vjho  have 
already  completed  two  courses  in  the  department.  Three 
hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Sherwood. 

A  study  of  the  Romantic  Movement,  designed  to  bring 
out,  through  investigation  of  selected  works,  certain 
phases  of  the  relation  of  English  to  German  Literature, 
and  of  English  to  French  literature,  during  the  period  of 
reaction  in  the  late  eighteenth  and  the  early  nineteenth 
century. 

23.  Critical  Problems  of  Ehzabethan  Literature.     III. 

Primarily  for  graduates^  but  open,  by  approval,  to 
seniors  who  have  completed  course  9.  Three  hours  a 
-week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Bates. 

This  course  w^ill  attempt  to  give  graduate  training  in 
literary  investigation.  To  each  student  will  be  assigned 
some  special  problem  of  source,  authorship  or  the  like, 
which  she  will  pursue  till  her  conclusion  is  reached,  re- 
porting progress  from  week  to  week  in  the  seminar.  In 
the  case  of  candidates  for  the  Master's  degree,  their  sub- 
jects will  be  related,  when  possible,  to  their  theses. 

24.  Critical  Problems  of  American  Literature.     III. 

Open  to  graduates  and  to  approved  seniors  who  have 
already  completed  two  courses  in  the  department.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Young. 

The  course  is  designed  for  the  investigation  by  seminar 
method  of  advanced  subjects  in  American  Literature. 
The  subject  for  common  research  in  1909-1910  is  the  his- 
tory of  New  England  Transcendentalism.  Topics  will  be 
assigned,  if  desired,  on  different  aspects  of  the  matter  in 
Emerson  and  the  minor  Transcendentalists ;  on  the  native 
sources  of  the  movement  in  seventeenth-century  Puri- 
tanism, the  Liberal  reaction,  etc. ;  and  on  the  foreign 
influences  from  English,  German,  Greek,  and  Oriental 
literatures. 
*  Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


78  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

II.    English    Composition 

PROFESSOR:  ^1^  SOPHIE    ChANTAL    HART,    M.A. 

Associate  Professors-.     Alice  Vinton  Waite.  M.A., 

Frances  Melville  Perry,  M.A. 

INSTRUCTORS:  ^JOSEPHINE    MAY    BURNHAM.    PH.B., 

Edith  Winthrop  Mendall  Taylor,  B.A., 
If  Clare  Macllflen  Howard,  M.A.. 
Agnes  Frances  Perkins,  M.A., 
Elizabeth  Wheeler  Manwaring,  B.A., 
Amy  Kelly.  M.A., 

Josephine  Harding  Batchelder,  B.A., 
Alice  Haskell,  M.A., 
Helene  Buhlert  Magee,  B.A. 
Assistants:    Susan  Josephine  Hart, 

Elizabeth  Bogman  Pope.  B.A. 

I  I.     Introductory  Course.     I. 

Required  of freshmeii.      Two  hours,  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Perkins,  Miss  Manwaring,  Miss  Kelly, 
Mrs.  Magee,  Miss  S.  J.  Hart,  Miss  Pope. 

First  semester:  exposition;  description;  narration. 
Weekly  themes.  Second  semester  :  critical  study  of  the 
essay,  and  of  the  structure  of  the  short  story.  Fortnightly 
themes  or  their  equivalent. 

X  2.     Argumentation  and  Critical  Exposition.     II. 

Required  for  a  degree.      Open  to  students  who  have  com- 
pleted course  i.      Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Perry,  Miss  Taylor, 

Miss  Batchelder,  Miss  Haskell. 

Fortnightly   themes,    or   their   equivalent.     Studies 

argumentation,  in  criticism,  and  in  forms  of  fiction. 


in 


\  4.     Critical    Exposition    and    Argumentation.       Advanced 
Course.     II. 

Open   to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.      Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Waite,  Miss  Taylor. 

IT  Absent  on  leave. 

J  If  a  student  submits  papers  notably  deficient  in  English,  as  part  of  her  work 
in  any  department,  she  will  incur  a  condition  in  English,  whether  or  not  she  has 
completed  the  required  courses  in  English. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  79 

This  course  aims  to  familiarize  the  student  with  methods 
of  composition  in  argumentation  and  critical  exposition 
inchiding  practice  in  the  collation  and  arrangement  of 
material,  the  analysis  of  prose  essay  style,  and  the  under- 
lying principles  of  criticism  of  poetry  and  of  the  drama 
and  novel. 

5.  General  Survey. 

Ope7i  only  to  studettis  in  the  Departme?it  of  Physical  Ed- 
ucation.     One  hour  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Perry,  Mrs.  Magee. 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  help  the  student  to  acquire, 
through  class  discussion  and  the  writing  of  themes,  a 
practical  knowledge  of  the  fundamental  principles  of 
English  composition. 

6.  Long  and  Short  Themes.     III. 

open  to  juniors  and  seniors.      Ttvo  hours  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Manwaring. 

Four  short  themes  or  their  equivalent  per  week.  Long 
themes  at  stated  intervals.  Critical  analysis  in  the  class 
room  of  themes  submitted. 

*  10.     The  Theory  and  History  of  Criticism.     III. 

Ope7t  to  juniors  and  sejiiors.      One  hour  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Hart. 

Lectures  on  the  critical  theory  of  Plato  and  Aristotle 
and  on  the  more  important  English  and  French  critics. 

*  16.     Advanced  Course  in  English  Composition.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  6.      Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hart. 

Studies  in  structure  and  style  with  frequent  practice  in 
writing. 
*  Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


80  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

III    English  Language. 

Professor  :  ^Sophie  Chantal  Hart.  M.A. 
Associate  Professors:    Laura  Emma  Lookwood,  Ph.D., 
Alice  Vinton  Waite.  M.A. 

INSTRUCTOR:     AMY   KELLY,  M.A. 

1.  Old  English.     II. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  zuho  have  com- 
pleted a  year  of  language  in  college.  Three  hours  a 
%veek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lockwood. 
A   study   of   Old    English    grammar.      The   reading  of 
Beowulf,  Judith,    The  Battle   of  Maldon,  and   selections 
from  the  prose  of  Alfred  and  CElfric. 

2.  Old  and  Middle  English.     III. 

Open  to  juniors,  seniors,  a7id  graduates  ivho  have  cojh- 
pleted  course  i.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kelly. 

First  semester ;  the  reading  of  the  poetry  of  Cynewulf 
and  of  selections  from  the  Riddles.  Second  semester : 
the  study  of  the  Middle  English  dialects  based  upon 
Emerson's  Middle  Efiglish  Reader.  The  reading  of  the 
romances  of  Havelock,  King  Horn,  Emare,  and  The 
Siege  of  Troy. 

3.  History  of  the  Enghsh  Language.     III. 

Open  to  Juniors  atid  seniors.  Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Waite. 
Origin  and  structure  of  the  English  Language  in  vocab- 
ulary, grammatical  inflections,  and  syntax  as  the  basis  of 
modern  usage. 

4.  Seminar  in  Old  English.     III. 

open  to  graduates  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the 
department.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lockwood. 
A  study  of  Old  English  inflections,  phonology,  and 
syntax.  The  reading  of  the  best  pieces  of  literature  in 
Old  English  prose  and  poetry.  A  particular  problem  in 
either  literature  or  language  is  assigned  to  each  student 
for  investigation. 

IT  Absent  on  leave. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  81 

FRENCH 

PROFESSOR:        HENRIETTE    LOUISE    TheRESE   COLIN,  PH.D.,    OFF.  I.  P. 
INSTRUCTORS:   ^VALENTINE   JULIE    PUTHOD,   OFF.  A., 

Magdeleine  Otten  Garret.  Lie.  es  L., 
Marie  Pauline  Regnie,  Lie.  es  L., 
Amelie  Serafon, 
Jeanne  Cheron,  Lie.  es  L. 

ASSISTANT:   SUZANNE    EMMELINE    DEBRIE,    B.  ES    L. 

Students  intending  to  do  graduate  work,  or  to  teach  in  secondary  schools 
should  consult  the  head  of  the  department  in  regard  to  the  selection  of  their  courses 
in  French.    All  courses  following  course  i  are  conducted  in  French. 

I  I.     Elementary  Course.     Grammar,  Composition,  Reading, 
and  exercises  in  speaking.     I. 

Open  to  all  students .      Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  serafon. 

This  course  includes  (i)  a  practical  study  of  grammar 
including  a  thorough  drill  in  inflections,  the  regular  and 
irregular  verbs ;  (2)  a  concise  survey  of  French  history ; 
(3)  the  reading  of  texts  chosen  from  a  certain  range  of 
authors  and  of  subjects  to  insure  the  acquisition  of  a 
comprehensive  vocabulary. 

\  2.     Elementary  Course.     Grammar,  Composition,   Reading 
and  exercises  in  speaking.     I. 

Of  en  to  all  students  who  have  comj)leted  course  i  or  the 
minimum  admission  requirement  in  French.  Three 
hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Carret,  Miss  Regnie, 
Miss  Serafon,  Miss  Cheron. 

A  systematic  review  of  syntax  introductory  to  original 
theme  w^riting  and  oral  narrative.  Selected  readings, 
prepared  and  sight,  from  ten  modern  writers,  part  plays. 

IT  Absent  on  leave. 

\  First-year  French  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree  if  taken  after 
the  sophomore  year,  nor  second-year  French  if  taken  after  the  junior  year. 
French  i  and  German  i  may  not  both  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree. 


82  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

3.     Intermediate   Course.     Studies   in    French    Idioms   and 
Structure;  Prosody.    I. 

Of  671  to  students  'who  have  7net  the  maximum  admission 
requiremejit  in  Fretick.      One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Carret,  Miss  Debrie. 
A  critical  consideration  of  French  idioms  and  structure, 
in  connection  with  course  5,  and  prosody. 

24.     Intermediate  Course.     Oral  Composition.     I. 

Open  to  sophomores^  juniors,  and  seniors  ivho  have  com- 
pleted course  2  or  its  equivalent.  One  hour  a  week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Regnie. 

This  course  furnishes  systematic  practice  in  speaking  as 
does  course  3  in  writing  French.  The  subject-matter  is, 
Representative  Alen  of  France,  illustrative  of  their  native 
provinces. 

5.     Intermediate  Course.    General  Survey  of  French  Litera- 
ture.    I. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the  maximum  admission 
requirement  in  French.      Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Carret,  Miss  Debrie. 

This  course  makes  the  student  acquainted  in  chronologi- 
cal sequence  with  a  considerable  number  of  literary  mas- 
terpieces that  France  has  produced  since  the  seventeenth 
century,  and  gives  her  some  idea  of  the  general  develop- 
ment of  the  literature  from  the  Renaissance  to  the  present 
day. 

29.     History  of  French  Literature.     II. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  com- 
pleted course  2.      Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Regnie. 

The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  show  clearly  by  means  of 
systematic  lectures  the  evolution  of  French  thought  in  the 
seventeenth,  eighteenth,  and  nineteenth  centuries,  its  ex- 
pression through  literature,  its  connection  with  the  life  of 
the  nation,  its  influence  on  the  political  destinies  of  the 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  8B 

people.     The  chief  writers  and  their  works  are  critically 
studied  with  the  aid  of  French  texts. 

Synopses,  themes,  and  discussions  test  the  student's 
grasp  of  this  rich  subject-matter. 

7.     Advanced  Grammar  and  Composition.      Essay  work  and 
journal  club.     II. 

Ofeji  to  students  -who  have  completed  courses  3  and ^^  or 
24  ajid  2g,     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Cheron. 
A  course  conducted  on  lines  of  actual  interest.     Period- 
icals on  the  shelves  of  the  College   library,   also  recent 
accessions,  enable  the  student  to  acquire  some  familiarity 
with  French  topics  of  the  day. 

19.     French    Social    Life   and   Manners — their  bearings   on 
French  Literature.     II. 

Opett  to  students  ivho  have  completed  courses  3  and ^^  or 
24  and  2g.      Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Charon. 
A  connected  study  of  legend,  tradition,  customs,  phases 
of  social  life,  for  the  purpose  of  tracing  the  twofold  growth 
of  the  language  and  the  literature  of  France. 

17.     Letters  of  Madame  de  S^vigne  and  Fables  of  Lafontaine, 
the  time  and  lives  of  these  writers.     II. 

Opeti  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  3  and ^^  or 

24  and  2g.     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Charon. 

Madame  de  Sevigne,  in  sparkling  prose,  presents  a 
living  picture  of  a  great  period,  the  seventeenth  century, 
while  Lafontaine,  in  genial  yet  satirical  verse,  points  to 
the  moral. 

Special  attention  is  given  to  the  correlation  of  the 
Letters,  masterpieces  in  epistolary  style,  to  the  Fablies, 
the  renovation  of  the  gettre,  and  its  importance  as  giving 
on  the  one  side  a  realistic  picture  of  the  various  classes  of 
society ;  on  the  other,  as  reflecting  the  artistic,  religious,, 
and  philosophic  ideals  of  the  times. 


84  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

*  14.     French  Literature  in  the  XVI.  Century — The  Renais- 

sance.    III. 

Ope7i  to  studefits  ruho   have  completed  course  ig  or  its 
equivale?it.       Two  hours  a  tueek  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Carret. 

A  study  of  the  new  life  in  art  and  letters ;  Marot ;  the 

Pleiade ;  Rabelais;  Montaigne;  the  Reformation,  Calvin. 

*  25.     Modern  French  Critics. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  ig  or  its 
equivalent.      Two  hours  a  week  for  the  second  setnester. 

Miss  Carret. 

A  study  of  modern  French  critics  in  literature  and  in 

art,  commencing  with  Sainte-Beuve,  and  including  Taine, 

Fromentin,  Lemaitre,  Larroumet,  Brunetiere,  Faguet,  and 

Anatole  France. 

30.     Studies  in  Style.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  7.       One 
hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Carret. 

Theory  and  Practice  :  A  critical  consideration  of  the  va- 
rious "-genres'"  and  translation  of  standard  English 
authors  that  are  chosen  as  a  term  of  literary  comparison. 

12.    The  Drama  of  the  XVII.  Century.     III. 

Open   to  students  who  have  cotnpleted  course  ig  or  its 
equivalent.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Madame  Colin. 
The  theatre  in  France,  the  influences  that  shaped  it,  the 
masterpieces  it  produced  are  successively  studied  as  repre- 
sentative of  the  nation  and  its  conception  of  art. 

9.     French  Literature  in  the  XVIII.  Century.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  ig  or  its 
equivalent.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Regnie. 

*Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  85 

A  comprehensive  account  of  movements  of  thought ;  and 
the  life,  time,  influence  of  Montesquieu,  Voltaire,  Jean- 
Jacques  Rousseau  :  the  drama  and  novel  as  presented  in 
the  works  of  Voltaire,  Regnard,  Lesage,  Marivaux,  Rous- 
seau, Beaumarchais ;  also  a  study  of  the  political  and 
philosophical  vv^ritings  of  Montesquieu,  of  Diderot,  of 
Rousseau. 

lo.     French  Literature  in  the  XIX.  Century.     III. 

Open  to  students  -who  have  completed  course  ig  or  its 
equivale7it.      Three  hours  a  tveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Carret. 

A  critical  study  of  the  principal  authors  of  the  nine- 
teenth century,  as  creative  personalities  in  lyric  poetry, 
the   drama,  history,   philosophy,  science,  art   and   fiction. 

23.     Balzac  and  his  types — Realism.     III. 

Open  to  graduates  and  seniors  ixjho  have  completed  two 
full  courses  in  Fre?ich.  Two  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Madame  Colin. 

A  study  in  characterization  during  the  first  half  of  the 
nineteenth  centurj^. 

2  7.  La  Nouvelle  Litterature — writers  of  the  last  decade.  III. 
Open  to  seniors  and  juniors  who  have  completed  tzvo 
full  courses  in  French.      Two  hours  a  week  for  the  year. 

Miss  R^gnie. 

A  critical  study  of  new  ideals  and  problems,  such  as 
collectivism,  traditionalism,  and  the  new  outlook  of  women 
as  seen  in  the  works  of  fiction  and  the  drama  since  1895. 

21.  French  Lyric  Poetry — the  Parnassians  and  Symbolists. 
III. 

Ope?i  to  graduates,  seniors,  also  to  juniors  with  -permission 
of  the  department,  who  have  completed  two  full  college 
courses  in  Fre^ich,  ijicluding  course  7  or  its  equivaletit. 
Two  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Madame  Colin. 


86  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

A  study  of  the  poetic  tendencies  and  movements  of  the 
second  half  of  the  nineteenth  centurj^  and  the  men  who 
led  in  them. 

II.     Old  French  and  Old  French  Literature.     III. 

Open  to  graduates,  and  to  seniors  by  permtssiofi  of  the 
department.      Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Madame  Colin. 
A  study  of  Old  French  in  numerous  extracts  and  some 
one  old  text,  with  a  consideration  of  the  general  laws  of  its 
phonetic  development  from  Latin  to  French,  and  the  evo- 
lution of  its  syntax. 


GEOLOGY  AND   GEOGRAPHY 

PROFESSOR:    ELIZABETH    FLORETTE    FISHER,    B.S. 
ASSISTANT:    RUTH   WeIR    RaEDER,    B.A. 

Graduate  ASSISTANT:  Winifred  Goldring,  B.A. 

I.     Geology.     II. 

Open  to  ju7iiors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  rvho 
have  completed  one  year  of  science.  Three  hours  a  rveek 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Fisher,  Miss  Raeder. 

The  work  of  the  atmosphere,  rivers,  glaciers,  oceans, 
volcanoes,  and  earthquakes  upon  the  present  earth. 
Records  of  these  are  shown  in  the  rocks.  The  story  of 
the  past  ages  of  the  earth,  and  its  life  as  revealed  in  these 
structures,  and  interpreted  by  these  forces.  Lectures, 
recitations,  and  six  field  lessons  during  the  year. 

*  2.     Mineralogy.     II. 

Opefi  to  students  zvho  have  completed  one  year  of  Chem- 
istry.     Three  hours  a  -week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Fisher. 
Lectures  and  recitations  and  two  hours  of  laboratory 
work  each  week.  Characteristics  and  origin  of  the  more 
important  mineral  species.  The  course  includes  blowpipe 
analysis  and  crystallography.  A  reference  collection  is 
always  available  for  students'  use. 
*Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction 


87 


3.  Advanced  Geography.     II. 

Ope7i  to  students  %vho  have  completed  one  year  of  science. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fisher,  Miss  Raeder. 

Lectures  and  recitations.  Laboratory  and  field  work, 
equivalent  to  two  hours  a  week. 

This  course  includes  a  detailed  study  of  physiography 
and  life  relations  (Ontography).  It  is  a  study  of  the 
direct  response  of  life  to  physical  geography.  It  explains 
the  origin  and  life-like  development  of  rivers,  valleys, 
plains,  plateaus  and  mountains  ;  it  points  out  the  changes 
which  these  forms  are  undergoing  to-day  and  the  resulting 
influences  upon  man.  Everywhere  it  is  found  that  life 
responds  to  physical  conditions  of  temperature,  rainfall, 
fertility  of  the  soil,  and  the  distribution  of  land  and  water. 
The  course  shows  that  physiography  has  guided  the  life, 
habits,  prosperity,  and  commercial  relations  of  peoples 
and  nations. 

4.  Field  Geology.     III. 

Open  to  stude?its  who  have  completed  course  i.      Three 

hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fisher. 

Advanced  field  study  with  lectures  and  discussions. 
The  aim  of  the  course  is  to  give  students  training  in  the 
methods  of  research  work  in  the  field.  Special  problems, 
areal,  stratigraphic,  structural,  petrographic,  physio- 
graphic, etc.,  are  assigned  for  investigation  A  small 
area  is  allotted  to  each  student,  and  the  results  of  the  field 
work  are  mapped  and  interpreted  for  final  paper. 

*5.     Petrography.     II. 

Open  to  stude?its  -who  have  completed  course  2.      Three 
hours  a  -week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Fisher. 

Lectures  and  recitations.  Laboratory  Work  two  hours  a 
week.  Laboratory  study  of  the  more  important  rock 
species.  Igneous,  sedimentary  and  metamorphic  rocks. 
The  work  is  intended  to  afford  the  student  an  opportunity 
to  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  macroscopic 
characteristics  of  the  principal  rock  types  and  the  methods 
of  petrographical  study,  and  to  enable  the  student  to 
gain  some  acquaintance  with  the  theories  of  modern 
petrography. 
*Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


88  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

GERMAN 

PROFESSOR:    MARGARETHE    MULLER. 

Associate   Professor:  Natalie  Wipplinger,  Ph.D. 
Instructors;  Hermine  Caroline  Stueven, 

Florence  Emily  Hastings,  M.A., 
Mariana  Cogswell,  B.A., 
Charlotte  Reinecke,  Ph.D., 
GusTJ  Schmidt. 

I  I.     Elementary  Course.    Grammar,  prose  composition,  read- 
ing, exercises  in  speaking,  memorizing  of  poetry.     I. 
open  to  all  students.      Three  hours  a  -week  fo9-  a  year. 

Miss  Cogswell. 
X  2.     Intermediate  Course.    Topics  as  in  course  i.     I. 

Open  to  all  students  who  have  completed  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hastings. 
1 4.     Intermediate  Course.     I. 

Ope?i  to  all  students  who  have  completed  the  mititmum 
admissioti  requirement  in  German.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Stueven,  Miss  Hastings. 

Courses  2  and  4  are  intended  to  fit  students  to  enter 
courses   15  and  16. 

5.     Grammar  and  Composition  (Intermediate  Course).     I. 

Open  to  freshme7t  who  have  met  the  maxhnuin  adynission 
requirement  in  German^  a7id  required  i?i  connection  with 
course  jo.^     One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Stueven,  Miss  Reinecke,  Madame  Schmidt. 

Review  of  elementary  grammar  and  study  of  more 
advanced  grammar.  Constant  practice  in  composition 
work.     Weekly  exercises  based  on  texts  read  in  course  10. 

JFirst-year  German  may  not  be  counted  toward  the  B.A.  degree  if  taken  after 
the  sophomore  year,  nor  second-year  German,  courses  2  and  4,  if  taken  after  the 
junior  year.  German  i  and  French  i  may  not  both  be  counted  toward  the  B.A. 
degree. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction 


89 


6.  Grammar  and  "  Freie  Reproduction  "  (Advanced).  III. 
Open  to  juniors  and  sejiiorsiuko  have  completed  course  30 
and  to  others  by  special  permission.      Three  hours  a  -iveek 

for  the  second  semester. 

•'  Miss  Hastmgs. 

Systematic  review  of  German  grammar.  Elements  of 
phonetics  (Biihnendeutsch) .  Exercises  in  oral  and  written 
expression.  Critical  examination  of  German  grammars 
and  texts  published  in  America. 

This  course  is  designed  especially  for  those  intending  to 
teach  German. 

8.     Grammar  and  Composition  (Advanced  Course).     II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  2  or  4,  and 
required  of  those  taking  coiirses  13  and  j6.  07ie  hour  a 
iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wipplinger,  Miss  Reinecke. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  much 
exercise  in  oral  and  written  expression.  Weekly  themes, 
one  hour's  preparation  and  special  topics  on  material 
treated  in  courses  15  and  16. 

9.     History  of  the  German  Language.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  course  8 
or  an  equivalent.      One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

This  course  aims  to  give  a  fuller  and  more  thorough 
understanding  of  the  modern  idiom  through  the  study  of 
its  historical  development.  Text-book:  Behaghel's  Die 
Deutsche  Sprache. 

10.     Outline  History  of  German  Literature.     I. 

Open  to  freshmen  who  have  met  the  maximum  admission 
requirement  in  German  and  required  in  co?inection  -with 
course  J.      Txvo  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Stueven,  Miss  Reinecke,  Madame  Schmidt. 


90  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  furnish  the  student  with 
the  vocabulary  necessary  for  the  reading  and  discussion  of 
literature,  and  to  give  her  a  general  mythological  and  his- 
torical background  for  the  more  detailed  study  of  German 
literature  in  subsequent  courses.  Texts  studied  :  Mobius' 
Goiter  U7id  Helde7isagen{¥LoQh.\er ^  Dresden) , Wenckebach's 
Metsterwerke,  Klenze's  Deutsche  Gedichte  (Holt) ,  Goethe's 
DicJitting  iind  Wahrheit  (Holt),  one  of  Schiller's  classic 
dramas. 

11.  Goethe's  Life  and  Works  (Introductory  Course).     II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  j  and  lo  or 
ij  and  i6.      Three  hours  a  -week  for  the  seco?id  sefuester. 

Miss  MUller,  Miss  Reinecke,  Madame  Schmidt. 

Lectures,  discussions.  Study  of  the  principal  character 
istics  of  Goethe's  life  and  vv^orks  to  the  time  of  his  literary 
co-operation  v^^ith  Schiller.  Works  read  and  discussed  in 
class  :  Gb'tz  von  Berlichingen^  iphige7iie,  selected  poems 
(Goebel).  Interpretation  of  "  Storm  and  Stress,"  in  con- 
nection with  '■'Gotz,'"  of  German  classicism  in  connection 
with  Iphigenie.  Private  reading  (3  hours  per  week)  : 
Goethe's  Briefe  {Langewiesche)^  Euripides'  Iphigenie^ 
Boyesen's  Life  of  Goethe. 

12.  Nineteenth  Century  Drama.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  courses 
II  and  22  and  are  taki7ig  course  2^.  Two  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Reinecke. 

Special  study  of  Kleist,  Grillparzer,  Otto  Ludwig, 
Hebbel  and  others ;  their  relation  to  classic  and  modern 
dramatic  art. 

13.  The  German  Novel.     II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  courses 
75  atid  16,  and  to  others  by  permission  of  the  depart- 
ment.     Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Muller,  Madame  Schmidt. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  91 

Presentation  of  the  historical  development  of  the  Ger- 
man novel,  in  lectures.  Special  study  of  some  of  the 
representative  novels  by  Goethe,  Jean  Paul,  Freytag, 
Keller,  Heyse,  Storm,  Sudermann  and  others. 

15.     History  of  German  Literature  I.     II. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  2  or  4,  and 
required  in  cojifiectioti  -with  course  8.  Tivo  hours  a  iveek 
for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger,  Miss  Reinecke. 

The  course  consists   of   lectures,    discussions,   reading. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  trace  the  parallel  develop- 
ment of  the  language,  literature,  social  conditions,  and 
religious  ideals  of  the  times.  The  works  read  and  dis- 
cussed are  :  the  Hildebrandslied,  selections  from  the  Ni- 
belu7igenlied,  the  works  of  Wolfram,  Gottfried,  Hartmann, 
the  Minnesingers  and  Meistersingers,  according  to  Wencke- 
bach's Deutsche  Literatur  geschichte  and  Musterstiicke. 
Reading  of  selections  from  Luther,  Hans  Sachs,  Volkslied. 
Occasional  references  to  Scherer's  and  Vogt  and  Koch's 
Geschichte  der  deutschen  Literatur. 

t6.     History  of  German  Literature  II.     II. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  75,  and  re- 
quired in  connection  -with  course  8,  and  to  others  by  per- 
mission of  the  department.  Tivo  hours  a  week  for  the 
second  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger,  Miss  Reinecke. 

The  course  is  a  continuation  of  course  15.  The  methods 
and  aims  are  the  same  as  in  the  preceding  course.  Chief 
topic :  the  classical  period  in  German  literature,  with 
special  emphasis  on  Lessing,  Herder,  Schiller,  Goethe. 

tiy.     Middle  High  German  (Introductory  Course).     III. 

Open  to  juniors  a7id  seniors  -who  have  completed  at  least 
courses  5  and  10,  or  ij  and  16.  Three  hours  a  iveek  for 
the  second  setnester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 


92  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

Survey  of  Middle  High  German  forms  and  sounds. 
Translation  of  Middle  High  German  epic  and  lyric  poetry 
into  the  modern  idiom.  A  knowledge  of  Old  High  Ger- 
man is  desirable,  although  not  strictly  required. 

1 8.  The  German  Romantic  School.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  a?id  seiiiors  ivho  have  cojupleted  courses 
II  and  22^  and  to  others  by  pertnisston  of  the  depart- 
ment.     Three  hours  a  -week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

Reading  of  works  representative  of  the  Romantic  School. 
Reference  books  :  the  histories  of  German  literature,  by 
Schlegel,  R.  Haym,  W.  Scherer,  G.  Brandes,  R.  Meyer, 
R.  Huch,  and  others. 

19.  Lessing  as  Dramatist  and  Critic.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  courses 
II  and  22,  a7id  to  others  by  pertnission  of  the  depart- 
ment.     Three  hours  a  -week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Miiller. 

Treatment  of  Lessing's  critical  work  in  literature,  the- 
ology and  aesthetics.  Works  read  and  discussed  are: 
Mtjma  Vo7i  Bartihebn,  Emilia  Galotti,  Nathan  der  Weise, 
Die  Hamburgische  Dramaturgies  Laokoon ;  Axiomata, 
A?iii-Gdtze,  Brziehutig  des  Me?ischengeschlechts.  Refer- 
ence books :  Erich  Schmidt's  Dessi/ig,  Kuno  Fischer's 
Lessing  als  Reformator  der  deutschen  Literatur,  Kuno 
Fischer's  Lessing's  Nathan  and  others. 

t  20.     Schiller  as  Philosopher  and  Writer  on  Esthetics.     III. 

Open  to  seniors  ivho  have  completed  course  22 ^  and  at 
least  two  of  the  folloivi?ig  courses  :  12,  /j,  18,  ig,  and  to 
others  by  permissioji  of  the  department.  Two  hours  a 
■zveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

Study    of    Schiller   through    his    correspondence   with 
Korner,  Goethe,  etc.,  and  his  philosophic-aesthetic  poems 
and  essays.     These  are  read  and  discussed  in  class. 
f  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  93 

21.     Goethe's  Faust,  Parts  I  and  II.     III. 

Opeti  to  seniors  -who  have  completed  at  least  two  of  the 
following  courses  :  j2,  /j,  i8,  ig,  and  to  others  by  per- 
missio?i  of  the  departme7it.  Three  hours  a  tueek  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Miiller. 

Extensive  study  of  Goethe's  Faust,  Parts  I  and  II.  The 
contrasting  of  the  Volksbuch  von  Dr.  Faust  with  Mar- 
lowe's Faustus  and  the  Faust-Puppenspiel.  Study  of  the 
genesis  of  Goethe's  Faust.  Compai-ison  of  the  Gochhausen 
"  Urfausf  and  the  fragment  of  1790  with  the  completed 
First  Part,  etc.,  etc.  Outside  reading  :  Bielschowsky's 
Lebeti  Goethe's;  Eckermann's  Gesprdche  mit  Goethe; 
philosophic  and  literary  essays  bearing  on  the  subject. 


22.     Schiller's  Life  and  Works  (Introductory  Course).     II. 

Ope7i  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  jo  or  75  ajid 
16.      Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  setnester. 

Miss  Wipplinger,  Madame  Schmidt. 

Lectures,  discussion.  Study  of  Schiller's  life  and  most 
important  dramatic  works.  Texts  :  Boyesen's  ;  Schiller's 
Life;  Die  Rduber  (Cotta)  ;  Wa  I  lenste  in  (Holt)  ;  Schiller's 
Poems  (Cotta). 


23.     Studies  in  Structure  and  Style.     III. 

Reqtcired    of  juniors    and    seniors     who     are     taking 
course  12. 

Miss  Reinecke. 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  enable  the  student  in 
course  12  to  perfect  herself  (orally  and  in  writing)  in 
grammar  and  "  good  style."     The  methods  used  in  this 


94  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

course  are  the  same  as  those  indicated  under  course  8. 
Fortnightly  themes  and  special  topics  on  material  treated 
in  course  12. 

j  26.     Gothic.     III.     (See  Department  of  Comparative  Phil- 
ology, Course  6.) 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

27.     German  Lyrics  and  Ballads.     II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  cojupleted  courses  5  and  10  or 
8,  75  and  16,      One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Stueven. 

The  work  in  this  course  will  extend  from  the  Minnege- 
sang  through  the  Volkslted,  to  the  lyric  poetry  of  Goethe, 
Schiller,  Heine,  and  others. 

30.     Studies  in  Modern  German  Idiom.     II. 

open  to  students  -who  have  completed  courses  5  ajid  10  or 
75  and  16^  and  to  those  ivho  have  completed  course  2  or  4 
by  special  permission.      One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hastings. 

This  course  is  designed  especially  as  a  companion  course 
to  courses  11  and  22.  A  number  of  modern  German  texts 
will  be  read  for  the  sake  of  the  idioms  they  contain. 
These  will  be  studied  in  suggestive  groups.  The  course 
enables  the  student  to  acquire  a  practical  knowledge  of  the 
written  and  spoken  German  of  to-day,  and  to  appreciate 
the  fine  turns  of  expression  in  the  German  classics. 

The  language  of  the  class  room  in  all  these  courses  is 
German,  except  in  course  26.  In  addition  to  lectures  in 
German  there  is  constant  practice  in  speaking  and 
Avriting. 

Students  who  intend  to  teach  German  should  take  at 
least  one  of  the  following  courses  :  6,  9,  30. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  95 

GREEK 

PROFESSOR:    ANGIE   CLARA   CHAPIN.    M.A. 

Associate  Professors:  ^Annie  Sybil  Montague,  M.A., 

Katharine  May  Edwards,  Ph.D. 
instructor:  mariana  cogswell,  b.a. 

I.  Lysias  (selected  orations)  ;  or  Plato  :  Apology  and  Crito ; 
Homer :  Odyssey  (selections  amounting  to  about 
2,500  verses).    Studies  in  Greek  life.     I. 

Open  to  students  who  have  met  the    maximum  admission 
requirement.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

*  2.     Attic  Orators  :  selections;  Euripides:  one  drama.     II. 

Open  to  studetzts  who    have    completed  course  i.       Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Montague. 

3.  Historians.      Thucydides :       The     Sicilian    Expedition ; 

Herodotus :    The   Persian    War;    ^schylus :    Per- 
sians.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i.      Three 
hours  a  tveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

4.  Origin  and  Development  of  Greek  Drama.     III. 

Open  to  students   who   have   completed  two  full  courses. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chapin. 

Aristotle's  Theory  of  Tragedy.  Reading  and  Criticism 
of  selected  dramas  ;  ^schylus  :  Prometheus  ;  Sophocles  : 
CEdipus  TyrannuSy  A7itigone;  Euripides:  Bacchce ;  hxis- 
tophanes:  Frogs  (selections).  A  study  of  all  the  extant 
plays  of  ^schylus  and  Sophocles  is  made  by  special  topics. 

5.  History  of  Greek  Lyric  Poetry.     III. 

open  to  students  who  have  completed  three  full  courses. 
Three  hours  a  'week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chapin. 

ITAbsent  on  leave. 
*Not  oftered  in  1909-1910. 


96  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

Lectures  and  readings  ;  Homeric  Hymns ;  Hesiod  ;  ele- 
giac poets ;  lyric  fragments  ;  Pindar ;  Bacchylides  ;  Theo- 
critus. 

*  7.     Greek  Dialects.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  three  full  courses. 
Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

A  comparative  study  of  the  Greek  dialects,  their  char- 
acteristics and  their  relations  to  each  other,  with  reading 
and  study  of  inscriptions  and  selected  texts. 


8.     History  of  Greek  Literature.     II. 

Ope7i  to  sophomores^  juniors^  and  seniors  nv ho  presented 
the  maximum  admissio7i  requirement  in  Greek,  or  who 
have  completed  courses  13  ajid  14.  One  hour  a  iveek  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Chapin,  Miss  Edwards. 

The  course  will  consist  of  lectures  and  readings  (in 
translation)  with  occasional  quizzes. 

The  aim  of  the  course  will  be  to  make  a  careful  study  of 
the  development  of  Greek  literature  in  the  various  forms 
of  both  prose  and  poetry. 

Note. — Advanced  students  of  literature  may  be  admitted 
by  permission  of  the  department  without  the  prerequisite 
in  Greek. 

*  9.     Modern  Greek.     III. 

Ope7i  to  students  tvho  have  completed  two  full  courses. 
One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

The  course  has  two  objects  :  first,  a  practical  one,  to 
give  some  acquaintance  with  the  spoken  and  written  Greek 
of  to-day;  second,  a  linguistic  one,  to  trace  the  historical 
development  of  the  language  from  classical  times  to  the 
present. 

*Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  97 

*  lo.     Plato :    PhcBcio   and   selections   from    other   dialogues. 
Collateral  readings  from  other  Greek  writers.     III. 
open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  two  full  courses. 
Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Montague. 

II.     Greek  Syntax  and  Prose  Composition.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  i.  One  hour 
a  "week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

This  course  is  especially  recommended  to  those  intend- 
ing to  teach  Greek. 

t  12.     Homeric  Seminary.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  three  full  courses. 
Three  hours  a  lueek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

Critical  study  of  selected  portions  of  the  Iliad  with  dis- 
cussions and  lectures  on  special  problems  of  Homeric 
grammar  and  antiquities,  supplemented  by  the  private 
reading  of  the  greater  part  of  the  Iliad. 

13.  Elementary  Course.  Greek  Grammar.  Xenophon  :  ^/z^^- 

asiSj  Book  II.     Practice  in  writing  Greek.     I. 
Opeji  to  all  students.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Cogswell. 

14.  Xenophon's   Anabasis,   continued.      Homer :    Iliad,   3 

books.  Sight  translation.  Prose  composition 
throughout  the  year  based  on  prose  read.     I. 

Ope?i  to  students  ivho  present  the  mt7iimum  admission 
requirement  iti  Greek,  or  ivho  have  completed  course  jj. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

For  additional  courses  see  Comparative  Philology  and  Clas- 
sical Archaeology. 

For  courses  in  the  study  of  Greek  Testament  see  Biblical 
History. 

*Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 


98  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

HISTORY 

Professor  :  Elizabeth  Kimball  Kendall,  M.A. 
Associate  Professors:  Julia  Swift  Orvis,  Ph.D., 

Edna  Virginia  Moffett,  Ph.D. 

Instructors:  Mabel  Elisabeth  Hodder,  M.A., 
Louise  Fargo  Brown,  Ph.D. 

I  I.     Political  History  of  England  to  1603.     I. 

Open  to  freshinen^  sophomores^  and  juniors^  and  to  sen- 
iors ivho  have  taken  no  college  course  in  history.  Three 
hours  a  iveek  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Orvis,  Miss  Brown. 

\  2.     Political  History  of  England  from  1603  to  the  present 
time.     I. 

Open  to  sophomores^  juniors^  and  seftiors  as  above,  and 
to  freshmen  -who  have  completed  course  i,  or  tvho  offer 
English  History  as  an  admission  subject.  Three  hours  a 
xveek  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Orvis,  Miss  Brown. 

The  aim  of  these  courses  is  to  train  students  in  the  use 
of  historical  material  and  in  dealing  with  historical  prob- 
lems. Emphasis  is  placed  on  political,  social,  and  indus- 
trial conditions  in  relation  to  race  development. 

I  3.     History  of  Western  Europe  from  the  Fifth  Century  to 
the  Treaties  of  Westphalia.     I, 

Open  to  freshme?t,  sophotnores,  juniors,  and  seniors. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moffett,  Mrs  Hodder, 
Miss  Brown. 

The  course  deals  primarily  with  mediaeval  history,  con- 
necting it  with  Rome  on  the  one  hand  and  with  modern 
Europe  on  the  other.  It  traces  the  beginnings  and  the 
development  (to  1648)  of  the  great  modern  powers  of 
Western  Europe.  It  aims  to  train  students  in  methods  of 
historical  work,  and  to  furnish  a  background  for  detailed 
study  of  particular  periods. 

X  Courses  i  and  2,  or  course  3,  are  prerequisite  to  later  election. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  99 

4.  History  of  the  French  Revolution.     II. 

Open  to  sopkotnores,  Jujitors,  and  seniors  who  have  com- 
pleted courses  i  and  2  or  course  3.  1  hree  hours  a  iveek 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Orvis. 
This  course  involves  (i)  an  introductory  discussion  of 
the  condition  of  France  on  the  eve  of  the  Revolution  ;  (2) 
a  detailed  study  of  the  progress  of  the  Revolution  and  of 
the  reaction  against  democratic  tyranny  culminating  in 
Imperialism;  (3)  an  inquiry  into  the  influence  of  revolu- 
tionary ideas  in  the  subsequent  history  of  France,  Ger- 
many, Austria,  Italy,  Spain,  and  Russia. 

5.  Constitutional  History  of  England  to  1399.     II. 

Open  to  Juniors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  courses  i 
and  2  or  course  3.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first 
semester. 

Miss  Moffett. 
A  study  of  the  development  of  English  constitutional 
government  as  an  expression  of  the  character  of  the  Eng- 
lish people.  The  course  deals  with  Germanic  origins,  and 
with  the  development  of  English  thought  along  constitu- 
tional lines  to  the  close  of  the  Plantagenet  period. 

6.  Constitutional  History  of  England  from  1399  to  the  pres- 

ent time.     II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  courses 
I  and  2  or  course  3.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Moffett. 

A  study  of  the  later  development  of  the  English  consti- 
tution, the  rise  of  party  and  cabinet  government,  and  the 
establishment  of  popular  control. 

7.  History  of  the  United  States  from  1787.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  courses 
I  and  2  or  course  j,  and  have  completed  or  are  taking  a 
second  course  in  history.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kendall. 
A  study  of  the  formation  and  development  of  the  consti- 
tution of  the  United  States,  with  special  reference  to  con- 
trolling forces,  such  as  the  organization  of  parties,  the 
growth  of  democracy,  the  rise  of  the  slave  power,  the  po- 
litical effects  of  the  development  of  the  West. 


100  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

I  8.     Europe  in  the  Fifteenth  Century.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  tvho  have  completed  two  full 
courses  in  history.      Three  hours  a  xveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moffett. 
A  study  of  the  intellectual,  religious,  and  social  life  of 
the  fifteenth  century,  and  of  the  institutions  and   move- 
ments which  were  its  outcome. 

*9.     Diplomatic  History  of  Europe  since  1740.     HI. 

Open  to  juniors  a?id  seniors  -who  have  completed  ttvo  full 
courses  in  history.      Three  hours  a  xveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Orvis. 

This  course  includes  (i)   a  review  of  the  period   1648- 

1740;  (2)    the  Age  of  Frederick  II;   (3)   a  Survey  of  the 

Revolutionary  and   Napoleonic   period ;    (4)    the   Age  of 

Bismarck. 

II.     History  of  Political  Institutions.     HI. 

Opeii  to  juniors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  irvo  full 
courses  in  history.      Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Kendall. 

This  is  an  introductory  course  in  the  comparative  study 
of  the  origin,  character,  development  and  aim  of  political 
institutions. 

*I2.     Growth  of  the  British  Empire.     HI. 

Opeti  to  ju7iiors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  two  full 
courses  ifi  history.  Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second 
semester. 

Miss  Kendall. 
This  course  includes  (i)  a  historical  review  of  the  de- 
velopment of  the  empire ;   (2)   a  study  of  the  changes  of 
colonial  policy;    (3)   a  study  of  colonial  administration, 
and  (4)  a  discussion  of  present  colonial  problems. 

13.     History  of  Rome.     II. 

Open  to  sopho7nores,ju7iiors,  and  seniors  xvho  have  taken 
one  college  course  ifi  history,  or  who  are  giving  special 
attention  to  Latin.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Hodder. 

\  History  8  and  History  i6  will  not  both  be  given  in  the  same  year. 
*Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  101 

This  course  offers  a  general  survey  of  Roman  History 
through  the  reign  of  Diocletian.  The  attempt  is  made  to 
present  the  problems  of  recent  scholarship  in  the  study  of 
the  earlier  period,  but  the  main  emphasis  is  placed  upon 
the  later  Republic  and  the  Empire.  Particular  attention 
■will  be  given  to  the  economic  and  social  conditions,  and  to 
the  development  of  the  Roman  system  of  government. 

14.  American  History.     II. 

a.  Age  of  Discovery  and  Conquest. 

b.  The  American  Revolution. 

Open  to  sophomores^  juniors^  and  seniors  'xuho  have  com- 
pleted or  are  taking  courses  i  and  2  or  course  3.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Brown. 

In  the  first  semester  the  discovery  and  exploration  of 
the  American  continents  by  the  Spanish,  English,  and 
French  will  be  treated  in  detail,  to  be  follov^ed  by  a  study 
of  the  contest  betv^^een  the  European  powers  for  control  in 
the  New  World.  The  second  semester  will  be  devoted  to 
a  careful  consideration  of  the  American  Revolution,  espe- 
cial attention  being  given  to  the  European  aspect  of  the 
struggle  between  England  and  her  colonies. 

15.  International  Politics.     II. 

Open  to  all  seniors  and  to  juniors  -who  have  cofnpieied  or 
are  taking  courses  i  and  2  or  course  3.  One  hour  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Kendall. 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  give  a  general  view  of 
international  conditions  since  the  close  of  the  Bismarck 
period  with  especial  reference  to  the  present  relations  of 
Europe,  America  and  Asia. 

1*16.     Europe  in  the  Sixteenth  Century.     III. 

open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  two  full 
courses  in  history.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Moffett. 

X  History  S  and  History  i6  will  not  both  be  given  in  the  same  year. 
*  Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


102  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

A  continuation  of  course  8,  though  the  latter  is  not  a 
prerequisite. 

A  brief  introductory  survey  of  conditions  in  the  fifteenth 
century  is  followed  by  a  more  detailed  study  of  the  six- 
teenth, its  movements,  and  its  great  personalities. 

17.  Political  History  of  Russia  from  the  earliest  times  to  the 

present.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  iivo  full 
courses  in  history.      Three  hours  a  xveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Orvis. 

This  course  includes  (i)  a  study  of  the  forces  which 
have  made  Russia  a  world  power,  and  (2)  an  inquiry  into 
the  development  and  policy  of  the  autocracy,  culminating 
in  the  present  revolution. 

18.  England  in  the  Fourteenth  and  Fifteenth  Centuries.     II. 

open  to  sophojnores,ju?iiors,  and  seniors  who  have  com- 
pleted one  college  course  in  history,  or  ivho  are  giving 
special  attention  to  English  Literature  or  Economics. 
Three  hours  a  tveeh  for  a  year. 

Mrs.  Hodder. 

A  study  of  the  political,  intellectual,  and  industrial 
changes  in  England  in  the  two  centuries  of  transition  from 
mediaeval  to  modern  times. 

19.  Geography  of  European  History.     II. 

Open  to  ju7iiors  and  seniors,  and  to  sophomores  who  have 
taken  one  college  course  in  history.  One  hour  a  xveek  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Moffett. 

The  institutions,  econotnic  and  social  conditions,  and 
political  history  of  some  parts  of  Europe  will  be  briefly 
studied  in  connection  with  their  topography.  Besides  the 
study  of  the  more  important  changes  of  boundaries,  the 
course  will  attempt  to  strengthen  the  connection  between 
events  and  localities,  to  give  a  clearer  conception  of  the 
scene  of  events  already  studied,  or  to  be  studied,  in  other 
courses  in  European  History. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  103 

HYGIENE   AND   PHYSICALr   EDUCATION 

Director:  Amy  Morris  Homans,   M.A. 
Instructors:  Carl  Oscar  Louis  Collin,  M.D., 

Frederick  Haven  Pratt,  M.A.,  M.D., 
Eunice  Blanche  Sterling.  M.D., 
EsTELLA  May  Fearon.  B.S., 
Loretto  Fish  Carney 
Annie  Chapin  Stedman, 
Edna  Lois  Williams, 
Marion  Wheeler  Hartwell. 
Assistant:  Margaret  Kreutz. 
Resident  Physician:  Katharine  Piatt  Raymond,  B.S.,  M.D. 
Medical  Examiner:  Myrtelle  Moore  Canavan,  M.D. 
AssiS'T   Medical  Examiner:  Sophie  Goudge  Laws,  M.D. 

A  two  years'  course  leading  to  the  certificate  of  the  department 
of  hygiene  and  physical  education  is  offered  to  special  students. 
This  course  is  especially  designed  for  the  training  of  teachers  of 
hygiene  and  physical  education.  In  order  to  be  admitted  to  this 
course,  candidates  must  meet  the  requirements  prescribed  for 
admission  to  the  freshman  class  (see  pages  25-46)  and  must  be  with- 
out organic  disease  or  serious  functional  disorder.  A  keen  sense 
of  rhythm  is  necessary.  The  opportunity  of  taking  this  course 
is  offered  to  candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  entering  in  September, 
1909,  and  thereafter.  In  the  near  future  admission  to  this  course 
will  be  limited  to  applicants  who  are  candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree 
at  Wellesley  College  and  to  those  who  already  hold  the  Bachelor's 
degree  either  from  Wellesley  or  from  some  other  college. 


I.    Courses  Prescribed  for  the  Certificate  of  the  Department 

Anatomy. 

See  Course  1 1  in  the  department  of  Zoology,  page  136. 


I.     Kinesiology. 


Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Three  hours  a  -week 
for  a  year. 

Dr.  Collin. 

Lectures  and  demonstrations  dealing  with  joint  mechan- 
ism, working  forces,  and  effects  of  postures  and  move- 
ments. 


104  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

2.  Practical  Gymnastics. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Five  hours  a  -week 
for  a  year. 

Dr.  Collin. 

3.  Corrective  Gymnastics  and  Massage. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.       One  hour  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Dr.  Sterling. 

In  addition  practice  in  the  college  clinic  for  students 
needing  remedial  exercises  is  required  for  three  hours  a 
week  in  the  second  semester. 

4.  Emergencies. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.      One  hour  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Dr.  Sterling. 

In  connection  with  this  course  practical  instruction  in 
bandaging  is  given. 

Physics. 

See  Course  2  in  the  department  of  Physics,  page  131. 

Chemistry. 

See  Course  12  in  the  department  of  Chemistry,  page  62. 

English  Composition. 

See  Course  5  in  the  department  of  English  Composition, 
page  79. 

5 .  Normal  Instruction  and  Gymnastic  Games. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Four  hours  a  iveek  for 
a  year. 

Dr.  Collin,  Miss  Williams,  Miss  Hartwell. 

6.  Dancing. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     One  hour  a  iveek  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Hartwell. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  105 

7.  Athletics. 

Required  of  all  first-year  students.     Six  hours  a  'week  in 
the  spring. 

Miss  Hartwell,  Miss  Williams,  Miss  Kreutz. 

8.  Swimming. 

Tivel've  hours  in  the  spring. 

9.  Theory  of  Gymnastics  and  Art  of  Teaching. 

Tnvo  hours  a  iveek  for   a  year.     Required   of  second-year 

students. 

Dr.  Collin. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  threefold:  (i)  to  make 
clear  the  needs  for  and  objects  of  physical  education  ; 
(2)  to  study  the  selection  and  progression  of  exercises 
for  definite  gymnastic  purposes;  (3)  to  point  out  and 
correct  technical  and  personal  faults  common  to  the  young 
teacher.     Lectures  and  conferences. 

10.  Practical  Gymnastics. 

Four  hours  a  nveek  for  a  year.     Required  of  second-year 
students. 

Dr.  Collin. 

1 1 .  Symptomatology. 

Tnvo   hours  a  iveek  for  the  first  semester.     Required  of 

second-year  students. 

Dr.  Sterling. 

The  brief  course  in  Symptomatology  is  intended  to  con- 
vey to  the  minds  of  the  students  an  estimate  of  the  general 
appearance  of  the  more  common  diseases.  There  are  two 
reasons  for  introducing  this  course  : — 

1.  To  enable  the  students,  in  their  future  work  as 
teachers,  to  detect  conditions  of  doubtful  health  in  appli- 
cants for  gymnastic  training,  and  so  warn  them  to  consult 
a  physician  before  undertaking  the  work. 

2.  To  enable  them  to  comprehend  more  intelligently  the 
information  given  by  physicians  regarding  patients  whom 
they  may  advise  to  take  gymnastic  training.  • 


106  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

12.  History  of  Physical  Education. 

One  hour  a   iveek  for  the  first  semester.     7(,eguired  of 
second-year  students. 

Miss  Stedman. 

The  object  of  this  course  is  to  give  the  student  a  con- 
nected outline  of  the  rise  and  development  of  physical 
education  as  a  science,  to  impress  the  importance  of 
national  health  through  a  survey  of  the  causes  of  success 
and  failure  in  ancient  peoples,  and  to  emphasize  the  rela- 
tion of  the  physical  director  to  the  movement  for  national 
health  to-day.  Lectures  and  assigned  reading.  Two 
papers  required. 

Education  and  Psychology. 

See  Course  5  in  the  department  of  Education,  page  69. 

Physiology. 

See  Course  12  in  the  department  of  Zoology,  page  136. 

13.  Hygiene 

Four  hours  a  nj^eek  for  the  second  semester.     Required  of 
second-year  students. 

Dr.  Pratt. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work. 

14.  Practice  Teaching. 

%equired  of  second-year  students. 

Dr.  Collin,  Miss  Williams,  Miss  Hartwell. 
This   is   given    in   the   college   classes   and    the    public 
schools  of  Wellesley. 

15.  Folk  Dancing  and  Games. 

One  hour  a  njoeek  for  a  year.      Required  of  second-year 
students. 

Miss  Williams. 

16.  Field  and  Track  Athletics. 

One  hour  a  nveek  for  the  first  semester.     Required  of  all 
second-year  students. 

Dr.  Collin. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  107 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  make  the  student 
acquainted  with  the  character' of  and  the  training  for  field 
and  track  athletics,  and  with  methods  of  modifying  and 
managing  them. 

17.  Corrective  Gymnastics. 

One  hour  a  week   for  a  year.      Required  of  all  second- 
year  students. 

Dr.  Sterling. 

In  addition,  practice  in  the  college  clinic  for  students 
needing  remedial  work  is  required  for  three  hours  a  week. 

18.  Outdoor  Games  and  Athletics. 

Fi've  hours  a  iveek  in  the  spring  and  in  the  fall.    Required 
of  all  second-year  students. 

Miss  Hartwell. 

19.  Anthropometry. 

One  hour  a  nveek  for  the  first  semester.     Required  of  all 
second-year  students. 

Miss  Carney. 

Students  acquire  practice  in  the  use  of  the  various  anthro- 
pometric instruments  for  measurements  and  strength  tests, 
in  recording  and  filing  measurements  and  computing  in- 
dices. Instruction  and  practice  in  testing  vision  and  hear- 
ing are  also  included  in  this  course. 

20.  Dancing. 

Two  hours  a  week  for  a  year.     %equired  of  all  second- 
year  students. 

Miss  Fearon. 

Classic  dancing,  theory,  and  practice. 
II.    Courses  open  to  all  Undergraduates 

2 1 .  Gymnastics  for  Beginners. 

Open  to  all  students  physically   qualified.     Two   hours   a 
week  from  November  until  April. 

Miss  Fearon,  Miss  Kreutz. 


108  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

2  2.     Intermediate  Gymnastics. 

Open  to  all  students  avho  ha^ve  completed  course     i   or  its 
equi'valent.      Tnvo   hours    a   tueek  from   No<vemher   until 

April. 

Miss  Fearon. 

23.  Advanced  Gymnastics. 

Open   to   all  students   nvho     ha've     completed     course    2. 
Tnuo  hours  a  nueek  from  No'vember  until  April. 

Miss  Fearon. 

24.  Corrective  Gymnastics. 

Open  to  all  students  ivhose  physical  examination  indicates 
the  need  of  remedial  nvork. 

Dr.  Sterling  and  Assistants. 

25.  Dancing. 

Open  to  freshmen  and  seniors.      Tnxjo  hours  a  week  from 
November  until  April. 

Miss  Fearon. 

26.  Dancing. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  juniors.     One  hour  a  njoeek  from 
No'vember  until  April. 

Miss  Kreutz. 

27.  Games,  Plays,  and  Folk  Dancing. 

Open  to  all  students.     One  hour  a  aveek  from  No'vember 
until  April. 

Miss  Williams. 

This  course  is  specially  designed  for  students  intending 
to  work  in  elementary  schools,  public  playgrounds,  and 
social  settlements. 

28.  Organized  Sports. 

Archery,  baseball  for  women,  basket  ball,  cricket,  golf, 
field  hockey,  rowing,  running,  tennis,  and  other  sports 
adapted  to  large  groups. 

Three  hours  a  nveek  in  the  fall  and  spring  terms. 

Miss  Fearon,  Miss  Williams,  Miss  Hartwell, 
Miss  Kreutz,  and  Field  Instructors. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  109 

Instruction  in  fencing,  riding,  and  swimming,  is  oftered, 
but  a  special  fee  is  charged. 

29.     Hygiene. 

%equired  of  freshmen.     One  hour  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Dr.  Raymond. 

Medical  examinations  :  A  regular  examination  is  required 
of  all  students  on  entering  college.  The  services  of  the 
resident  physician  for  consultation  and  treatment  are  free. 

ITALIAN 

Associate  Professor:  Margaret  Hastings  Jackson. 

I  I.     Elementary  Course.     I. 

Opeti  to  sophomores.,  Junioys,  and  seniors.  Three  hours  a 
iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Grammar  with  written  and  oral  exercises ;  reading  and 
sight  translation  ;  conversation. 

2.     Intermediate  Course.     II. 

open  to  students  -who  have  completed  course  i .  Three 
hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Grammar,  prose  composition  ;  reading  and  translation 
at  sight,  in  the  first  semester  from  modern  authors,  in 
the  second  semester  from  the  classic  authors. 

*  3.     History  of  Italian  Literature  in  the  XIII.  and  XIV.  Cen- 
turies.    Emphasis  on  Dante.     III. 

Open.,  on  consultation  with  the  instructor.,  to  juniors 
and  seniors  who  have  a  reading  knotvledge  of  Italian. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Selections  from  the  Vita  Nuova  and  the  Divina  Corn- 
media  of  Dante.  The  Sonnets  of  Petrarch  and  the  Tales 
of  Boccaccio  will  be  read  in  the  original. 

J  After  1909-1910  this  course  if  taken  in  the  senior  year  may  not  count  within 
the  minimum  number  of  hours  prescribed  for  a  degree. 
♦Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


110  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

4.  History  of  Italian  Literature  in  the  XIX.  Century.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  2^  or 
equivaletits.      Three  hours  a  iveeh  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

5.  Dante  and  the  early  Italian  Renaissance.     English  Course. 

II. 

Open  to  Juniors  and  seniors.      Three  hours  a  -week  for  a 

year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

First  semester:  Dante's  Divine  Comedy  (in  English) 
and  the  conditions  of  the  age  which  produced  it.  Second 
semester :  The  early  Italian  Renaissance  as  expressed  in 
the  works  of  Petrarch,  Boccaccio,  Niccolo  Pisano,  Arnolfo, 
and  Giotto.     A  knowledge  of  Italian  is  not  required. 

Note. — The  Dante  Society  offers  an  annual  prize  of  one 
hundred  dollars  for  the  best  essay  on  a  subject  drawn  from 
the  life  or  works  of  Dante.  The  competition  is  open  to 
students  or  graduates  of  not  more  than  three  years'  stand- 
ing from  colleges  or  universities  in  the  United  States.  For 
subjects  and  conditions  consult  page  540  of  the  Harvard 
University  Catalogue,  1908-1909. 

t  7.     Italian  Prose  Writers  of  the  Fifteenth  and  Early  Six- 
teenth Centuries.     III. 

Open^    on    consultatiofi   -with    the   instructor,  to  juniors 

and  seniors  ivho  have  a  reading  knowledge  of  Italian. 

Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Jackson. 

Selections  from  the  works  of  Macchiavelli,  Guicciardini, 
Savonarola  and  other  writers  of  the  period  will  be  read  in 
the  original. 

8.     Italian  Poets  of  the  Fifteenth  and  Early  Sixteenth  Cen- 
turies.    III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  have  a  reading  knowl- 
edge of  Italiatt,  on  consultation  with  the  instructor. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Jackson. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  111 

Selections  from  Poliziano,  Lorenzo  de'  Medici,  Boiardo, 
Ariosto,  Michael  Angelo,  Vittoria  Colonna  will  be  read  in 
the  original. 

While  courses  7  and  8  are  continuous,  one  being  the 
complement  of  the  other,  they  may  be  elected  separately. 

I  9.     Literature  of  the  Italian  Renaissance.     III. 

Open  on  consultation  witk   the   instructor   to  graduate 

students   -who    have    a    reading    knoivledge    of   Italian. 

Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Jackson. 

It  is  not  the  intention  of  the  instructor  to  cover  the 
entire  period  of  the  Renaissance  but  treat  of  certain  aspects 
only,  the  work  to  adjust  itself  to  the  needs  of  the  individual 
student.  Under  the  supervision  of  the  instructor  the  stu- 
dent will  choose  some  author,  or  phase,  or  problem  of  Ital- 
ian Literature  for  special  study  reporting  thereon  weekly. 


LATIN 

PROFeSSOR:  ^ADELINE   BELLE    HAWES,   M.A. 

Associate  Professors:  Alice  Walton.  Ph.D.. 

Caroline  Rebecca  Fletcher.  M.A. 

INSTRUCTOR:  VIRGINIA   JUDITH   CRAIG.    PH.D. 

Assistant:  Lulu  Geneva  Eldridge,  M.A. 

1.  Livy,  Books  XXI,  XXII :  Cicero,  De  Senectute,  Soranium 

Scipionis;  Horace,  Odes,  Book  I.     I. 
Open  to  students  -who  have  met  admission  requirement. 
Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fletcher,  Miss  Craig,  Miss  Eldridge. 

Practice  in  writing  and   translation  to   give  facility  in 
reading  and  flexibility  in  the  use  of  English  in  translation. 

2.  Poetry  of  the  Augustan  Age,  Horace.     II. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  i.      Three 
hours  a  -week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Fletcher,  Miss  Craig. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 
II  Absent  on  sabbatical  leare. 


112  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

The  Odes^  Books  II-IV,  are  studied,  with  selections  from 
the  Epodes,  Satires,  and  Epistles. 

Note. — Beginning  with  1910-1911  a  course  in  Vergil, 
course  8,  Avill  be  offered  as  a  second  sophomore  elective. 

1 7.     Studies  in  Tacitus  and   Pliny.     Outline  History  of  the 
Early  Empire.     II. 

open  to  students  ivho  have  cotnpieted  either  course  2  or 
course  8.      Three  hours  a  -week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Fletcher,  Miss  Craig. 

Tacitus,  Germania  and  Agricola,  with  selections  from 
the  other  works.  The  work  in  Pliny  includes  careful 
study  of  certain  letters  and  the  rapid  reading  of  many 
others. 

II.     Latin  Prose  Composition.     Intermediate  Course.     II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  i  and  are 
taking  a  full  course  in  the  department.  One  hour  a 
zveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fletcher. 
7.     Sight  reading  in  prose  and  verse.     II. 

open  to  students  -who  are  taking  course  2-17.  One  hour 
a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Walton. 

4.  Comedy.     Plautus  and  Terence.     III. 

Open  to  studefits  who  have  completed  two  full  courses. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 
This  course  includes  the  careful  study  of  two  or  more 
plays  together  with  the  rapid  reading  of  several  others. 

5.  Satire.     Horace  and  Juvenal.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

This  course  includes  the  reading  of  selected  satires  of 
Horace  and  Juvenal,  with  study  of  other  Roman  satirists 
by  lectures  and  special  topics. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  113 

t  lo.     Latin  Prose  Composition.     III. 

Ope7i  at  the  discretion  of  the  iiistructor  to  students  who 
have  completed  course  ii  and  ivho  are  taking  a  full 
course  in  the  department.      One  hour  a  -week  for   a  year. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

12.     Outline  History  of  Latin  Literature.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses, 
and  who  are  taki7ig  a  full  course  in  the  department. 
One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Walton. 

Lectures  and  readings,  with  direction  of  the  students' 
private  reading. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  to  give  a  general  survey  of 
the  subject,  tracing  the  beginnings  and  development 
of  the  various  kinds  of  prose  and  poetry,  and  considering 
the  changes  in  the  political  and  social  conditions  under 
which  Latin  literature  developed. 

I  15.     Topography  of  Rome.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 
Lectures  and  discussions. 

Architectural  History  and  Topography  of  Ancient  Rome  ; 
Studies  in  Pompeii. 

%  18.     Latin  Epigraphy.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 

16.     Private  Life  of  the  Romans.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  two  full  courses, 
and  who  are  taking  a  full  course  in  the  department. 
One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Craig. 

Lectures  on  various  topics  illustrating  the  life  of  the 
Romans,  readings  and  discussions. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year, 

X  Archeology  3-4  and  Latin  15-18  are  not  usually   given  in  the  same  year. 


114  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

♦14.     Literature  of  the  Empire.     III. 

open  to  studefits  who  have  completed  three  full  courses. 
Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hawes. 
The   readings   in   this  course  are   chosen  from   a  wide 
range  of  authors  and  vary  from  year  to  year.     Lectures 
on  various  aspects  of  life  under  the  Roman  Empire. 

9.     Latin  Poetry.     III. 

open  to  stude7its  ivho  have  completed  three  full  courses. 

Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Fletcher. 

Selections  from  Catullus  and  the  Augustans.  Poetry 
of  the  Empire  :  the  authors  read  vary  somewhat  from  year 
to  year. 

Classical  Arcliseoloffy 

Associate  Professor:  Alice  Walton,  Ph.D. 

t  6.     Introduction  to  Classical  Archaeology.     II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  one  full 
course  i?t  Latin  or  Greek.     Tvjo  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Walton. 

Outline  history  of  prehistoric  remains  in  Greece  and 
Italy,  with  special  emphasis  upon  Mycenae  and  Crete; 
introductory  study  of  Greek  vases,  Greek  and  Roman  coins, 
painting,  bronzes  and  gems. 


*  + 


3.     Topography  of  Greek  sites  with  special  reference  to 
Athens.     III. 

open  to  students  -who  have  completed  three  full  courses 
in  Greek.      Three  hours  a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 
The  work  will  be  based  upon  the  text  of  Pausanias,  in 
which  there  will  be  practice  in  rapid  reading,  besides  close 
study  of  architectural  history  based  on  certain  portions. 

*  Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 

X  Archaeology  3-4  and  Latin  15-18  are  not  usually  given  in  the  same  year. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  115 

*  1 4.     History  of  Greek  Ceramics.     III. 

Open  to  seniors  -who  have  completed  coursed  or 3.    Three 
hours  a  -week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Walton. 
So  far  as  possible,  the  work  will  be  illustrated  by  the 
vase  collection  in  the  Boston  Museum  of  Fine  Arts. 


APPLIED   MATHEMATICS 

Professor:  Ellen  Hayes.  B.A. 

I.     Introduction  to  the  Mathematical  Treatment  of  Science. 
H. 

Open  to  sopho7nores,  Juniors,  and  seniors  ivho  have  com- 
pleted Pure  Mathematics  i.  Three  hours  a  -week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Hayes. 
An  introduction  to  the  mathematical  treatment  of 
science,  containing  the  practical  essentials  of  calculus  and 
analytic  geometry  and  the  elements  of  mechanics.  (The 
required  freshman  mathematics  may  be  combi?ied  -with  this 
course  and  other  courses  in  applied  mathematics  tofonn  a 
restricted  elective.) 

1 3.     Thermodynamics.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  iveek  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Hayes. 

1 4-     Theoretical  Mechanics.     III. 

Ope7i  to  students  -who  have  completed  course  i.      Three 

hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hayes. 

This  course  is  a  continuation  of  course  i,  and  is  devoted 
to  the  further  development  of  the  principles  of  kinematics, 
statics,  and  kinetics. 

*Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 

J  Archeology  3-4  and  Latin  15-1S  are  not  usually  given  in  the  same  year, 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 


116  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

5.     Geodynamics.     III. 

Open   to  juniors  and  seniors  properly  qualified.      Txvo 
hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Hayes. 

Both  the  astronomical  and  geological  aspects  of  the 
subject  are  emphasized.  In  general,  the  topics  discussed 
are :  theories  concerning  the  origin  of  the  earth ;  preces- 
sion, nutation;  form,  size,  density  of  the  earth;  thermal 
condition  of  the  earth. 


PURE   MATHEMATICS 

Professor:  Ellen  Louisa  Burrell,  B.A. 

Associate  Professors:   Eva  Chandler,  B.A., 

Helen  Abbot  Merrill,  Ph.D., 
Roxana  Hayward  Vivian,  Ph.D. 

INSTRUCTORS:  ^MABEL    MINERVA  YOUNG,  M.A., 

Clara  Eliza  Smith,  Ph.D., 

Euphemia  Richardson  Worthington,  Ph.D. 

I.     Required  course  for  freshmen.     I. 

Four  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

{a)     Solid  and  Spherical  Geometry 

Three  hours,  first  semester, 
{b)     Higher  Algebra. 

One  hour^  first  semester  j  two  hours,  second  semester. 

The  subjects  included  are  :  Functions  and  Theory  of 
Limits,  Derivatives,  Development  of  Functions  in  Series, 
Convergency  of  Series,  Theory  of  Logarithms,  Determi- 
nants, Theory  of  Equations  (including  Sturm's  Theorem). 
(Taylor's  College  Algebra.) 

{c)     Plane  Trigonometry. 
Two  hours,  second  semester. 

The  angular  analysis,  including  transformations,  trigo- 
nometric equations  and  inverse  functions,  is  fully  treated, 
as  well  as  the  solution  of  triangles  and  the  practical  use  of 
the  tables. 

Miss  Chandler,  Miss  Merrill, 

Miss  Vivian,  Miss  Smith,  Miss  Worthington. 

H 'Absent  on  leave. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  117 

2.  Conic  Sections  and  Plane  Analytical  Geometry.     II. 

Open  to  students  -who  have  completed  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  xveekfor  a  year. 

Miss  Burrell,  Miss  Chandler,  Miss  Merrill. 
A  brief  course  in  geometrical  conies  is  given  in  connec- 
tion with  the  usual  analytical  work,  with  correlated  work 
in  geometrical  drawing. 

3.  Differential  and  Integral  Calculus.     III. 

Open  to  studejtts  %vho  have  completed  course  2^  or,  tvith 
the  approval  of  the  instructor,  to  those  who  are  taking' 
course  2.      Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Burrell. 
The  applications  include  a  course  in  curve  tracing. 

12.     Algebraic  and  Trigonometric  Analysis.    II. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  j  and  are 
taking  or  have  completed  course  2.  One  hour  a  week  for 
a  year. 

Miss  Burrell. 

Fundamental  concepts ;  development  of  the  complete 
number  system  of  algebra ;  graphic  representation  ;  trig- 
onometry as  a  part  of  pure  algebra ;  De  Moivre's  Theo- 
rem ;  the  fundamental  theorem  of  algebra ;  further  work 
in  series  ;  the  generalized  logarithm  ;  hyperbolic  functions. 

4.  Theory  of  Equations,  with  Determinants.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  3.      Three  hours  a  week  for  the  frst  setnester. 

Miss  Chandler. 
The  work  is  based  on  Burnside  and  Panton's  Theory  of 
Equations. 

5.  Solid  Analytical  Geometry.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  3.      Three  hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Chandler. 

The  straight  line ;  the  plane ;  surfaces  of  the  second 
order.     Brief  study  of  surfaces  in  general. 


118  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

6.     Modern  Synthetic  Geometry.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  or  are  taking 
course  3.     Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Burrell. 

Metrical  and  projective  properties  of  plane  and  sheaf 
forms  of  the  first  and  second  orders ;  the  anharmonic 
ratio  :  harmonic  forms  ;  the  method  of  inversion  ;  involu- 
tion ;  collineation ;  the  law  of  duality ;  theory  of  poles 
and  polars ;  reciprocation ;  space  forms  and  surfaces  of 
the  second  order.  Given  by  lectures  and  references,  with 
constant  practice  in  the  solution  of  geometrical  problems. 

1 9.     Higher  Analysis.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  3.  Three 
hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Merrill. 

Functions  of  a  real  variable,  including  definite  integrals, 
elliptic  integrals,  infinite  series  and  products.  Beta  and 
Gamma  functions.  Introduction  to  the  theory  of  func- 
tions of  a  complex  variable. 

*  10.     Differential  Equations.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  3.  Three 
hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Chandler. 

A  general  course  in  ordinary  and  partial  differential 
equations. 

*ii.     Analytical  Projective  Geometry.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  3^  and  have 
completed  or  are  taking  course  6.  Three  hours  a  iveek 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Burrell. 

A  lecture  course,  introductory  to  the  principles  of 
modern  geometry. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 
*Not  offered  in  190Q-1910. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  119 

MUSIC 

Professor  :  Hamilton  Crawford  Macdougall,  Mus.D. 
Associate   Professor:  Clarence  Grant  Hamilton,  M.A. 
instructors:  emily  josephine  hurd, 
Edith  Estelle  Torrey, 
Hetty  Shepard  Wheeler,  M.A., 
Albert  Thomas  Foster, 
Alice  Ayers  Cummings. 
Assistant:  Annie  Bigelow  Stowe. 

I.    Musical  Theory 

The  courses  in  theory  and  history  are  open  to  all  stu- 
dents without  regard  to  previous  musical  knowledge,  and 
count  toward  the  B.A.  degree.  The  history  and  theory 
courses  are  subject  to  no  separate  tuition  fee,  with  the 
exception  of  courses  9,  10,  11,  and  12,  where  a  nominal  fee 
of  five  dollars  is  charged  for  tuning  and  repairs  of  instru- 
ments. Courses  8,  4,  and  14,  are  designed  especially  for 
those  students  desiring  to  gain  an  appreciative  knowledge 
of  musical  literature. 

15.     Elementary  Theory.     I. 

Open  only  to  freshmen  ^juho  are  taking  practical  music. 
Tojuo  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year.     No  prerequisites. 

Miss  Wheeler,  first  semester. 
Miss  Stowe,  second  semester. 
This  course  is  designed  for  freshmen  who  enter  college 
with  the  intention  of  specializing  in  music.  It  may  be 
followed  by  course  i,  but  not  by  course  8.  This  course 
covers  elementary  acoustics,  modern  musical  notation, 
diatonic  and  chromatic  scales,  invention  and  harmoniza- 
tion of  melodies,  invention  and  harmonization  of  basses, 
up  to  and  including  the  chord  of  the  dominant  seventh. 

8.     Foundation  Principles.     I. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  seniors,  and  advanced  fresh- 
men {fi.'ve-year  music  course) .  Three  hours  a  nxjeek  for  a 
year.     No  prerequisites. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

This  course  covers  the  ground  necessary  for  admission 
to  courses  i  or  4,  and  also  offers  a  substantial  foundation 


120  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

for  subsequent  work  in  practical  or  theoretical  music.  It 
includes  the  study  of  elementary  acoustics  in  its  relation 
to  music  ;  the  intervals  ;  the  modern  scales  ;  the  formation 
and  connection  of  the  fundamental  triads  and  the  dom- 
inant-seventh chord ;  the  elements  of  rhythm  and  melody. 
Much  attention  will  be  devoted  to  ear  training,  and  to  the 
realization  of  the  principles  of  the  course  in  choral  practice. 
This  course  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken 
course  15. 

I.     Harmony.     II. 

Open  to  students  nvho  hwue  completed  course  13  or  course 
8.     Three  hours  a  nveek  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

This  course  covers  the  formation  and  interconnection  of 
chords ;  modulation ;  non-harmonic  tones ;  analysis  of 
harmony  in  standard  works  ;  invention  of  melodies  and 
the  expansion  of  the  harmonic  accompaniment.  The 
course  aims  to  give  facility  in  elementary  composition. 

9.     Applied  Harmony.     H. 

Open  to  those  students  only  avho  are  at  the  same  time 
taking  course  i.  Tivo  hours  a  nveek  for  a  year.  A 
laboratory  fee  office  dollars  is  attached  to  this  course. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

This  course  aims  to  realize  synthetically  at  the  piano- 
forte the  principles  taught  in  course  i,  following  what 
may  be  termed  a  laboratory  method. 

Note. — Instruction  will  be  given  in  small  classes  of  not 
less  than  three  students.  The  course  is  in  no  sense  a 
substitute  for  pianoforte  lessons.  Students  must  satisfy 
the  head  of  the  department  that  they  have  a  pianoforte 
technique  adequate  for  the  work ;  in  general,  the  ability 
to  play  the  easier  Mendelssohn  Songs  without  Words,  and 
to  read  hymn  tunes  accurately  at  sight  will  be  sufficient. 

4.     The  Development  of  the  Art  of  Music.     HI. 

Open  to  students  'who  have  completed  course  8  or  course 
I.     Three  hours  a  'week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  121 

A  course  in  the  appreciation  of  music  designed  to 
develop  musical  perception  and  the  ability  to  listen  intel- 
ligently to  the  best  music.  It  includes  the  evolution  of 
rhythm,  harmony,  and  melody,  and  their  povsrers  and 
offices  in  musical  expression  ;  the  principal  musical  forms 
analytically  considered  ;  studies  of  the  principal  composers, 
their  lives,  their  strongest  Mrorks,  their  relation  to  the 
progress  of  musical  art.  Some  great  work  will  be  selected 
for  study  during  the  year. 

This  course  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  or 
are  taking  course  14. 

*  10.     Applied  History.     III. 

Open  to  those  students  only  nvho  are  at  the  same  time 
taking  course  4.  Tivo  hours  a  ijueek  for  a  year.  A 
laboratory  fee  of  five  dollars  is  attached  to  this  course. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

This  course  aims  to  realize  synthetically  at  the  piano- 
forte the  development  of  music  from  the  organum  of 
Hucbald  to  the  Wagner  opera.  Specimens  of  the  music 
of  various  schools  and  periods  will  be  collected,  played, 
and  analyzed.     See  note  to  course  9. 

6.     Counterpoint.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  have  completed  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  nveek  for  the  first  semester. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 
Counterpoint  in  two,  three,  and  four  voices ;  double 
counterpoint;  analysis;  the  distinctions  between  strict 
(modal)  and  free  counterpoint ;  the  rules  for  the  latter 
deduced  from  contemporaneous  practice ;  fugue  for  two 
and  three  voices. 

II.     Applied  Counterpoint.     III. 

Open  to  those  students  only  ivho  are  at  the  same  time  tak- 
ing course  6.  Tivo  hours  a  nveek  for  the  first  semester. 
To  this  course  a  laboratory  fee  of  tivo  dollars  and  a  half 
is  attached. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

*Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


122  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

This  course  aims  to  realize  synthetically  at  the  piano- 
forte the  laws  of  simple  and  double  counterpoint  by  the 
constant  playing  and  analysis  of  the  best  examples  from 
the  masters.     See  note  to  course  9. 

7.     Musical  Form.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  haue  completed  course  6.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

This  course  aims  to  cover  the  various  imitative  forms, 
the  suite  and  sonata  forms,  the  large  forms  of  vocal  and 
orchestral  music. 

Students  have  the  opportunity  of  doing  practical  work 
in  composition  (song  form,  sonata  movements,  etc.). 

12.     Applied  Form.     III. 

Open  to  those  students  only  nvho  are  at  the  same  time  taking 
course  7.  T-xvo  hours  a  iveek  for  the  second  semester.  To 
this  course  a  laboratory  fee  of  t-ivo  dollars  and  a  half  is 
attached. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

This  course  aims  to  play  and  to  analyze  a  great  number 
of  specimens  of  the  various  forms,  with  careful  analysis 
and  classification.     See  note  to  course  9. 

14.     History  of  Music.     I. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors,  and  seniors.  Three  hours  a 
njueek,  counting  as  tivo.     No  prerequisites. 

Mr.  Hamilton. 

A  non-technical  course  in  the  history  of  the  music  of 
all  nations,  for  which  no  previous  knowledge  of  music  is 
required.  One  appointment  each  week  will  be  devoted  to 
illustrative  programs. 

This  course  is  not  open  to  students  who  have  taken  or 
are  taking  course  4. 

This  course,  unless  combined  with  courses  15  and  i, 
cannot  count  as  one  of  the  courses  necessary  for  sopho- 
mores, juniors,  and  seniors  who  are  taking  lessons  in 
practical  music. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  123 

*i3.     The  Symphony  from   Joseph   Haydn   to   the   Present 
Time.     III. 

Open  to  students  ivho  ha<ve  completed  courses  i  and  4  {or 
their  equivalent),  and  'who  ha've  some  facility  in  playing 
the  pianoforte.     Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 
A   historical   course,    tracing   the   development   of    the 
Symphony    in    its    form,    its    instrumentation,    and    its 
content. 

17.     Free  Composition.     III. 

Open  by  permission  to  students  nvho  have  completed  6  and 
7.     Three  hours  a  iveek  for  the  year. 

Mr.  Macdougall. 

A  limited  number  of  tickets  for  reserved  seats  at  the 
Boston  Symphony  concerts  are  free  to  students  in  the  de- 
partment who  are  able  to  use  them  profitably.  In  connec- 
tion with  these  concerts  the  department  will  give  weekly 
analyses  of  the  programs  in  Billings  Hall,  with  instru- 
mental and  vocal  assistance. 

II.    Practical  Music  Clnstrumental  and  Vocal  L,essons) 

[Attention  is  called  to  the  fact  that  a  good  student  need  not  necessarily  spend 
five  years  in  college  in  order  to  carry  on  practical  music  at  the  same  time  with  the 
academic  course.     See  (a)  below.] 

It  is  believed  that  students  having  a  command  of  pianoforte  or 
organ  technique  will  be  able  to  profit  by  the  theoretical  instruction 
given  in  the  department  to  a  fuller  degree  than  those  without  such 
a  technique.  To  encourage  students  to  acquire  a  technique,  as 
well  as  to  furnish  authoritative  instruction,  the  department  under- 
takes to  give  lessons  in  pianoforte,  organ  and  violin  playing  and  in 
singing.  Practical  work  is  an  elective,  and  students  should  notify 
the  department  of  their  election  of  the  subject  in  the  usual  manner 
and  at  the  proper  time ;  with  the  exception  of  the  applied  music 
courses,  9,  10,  11,  12,  practical  work  does  not  count  toward  the 
B.A.  degree.  It  is  offered  to  all  students,  whether  candidates  for 
degrees  or  not,  as  stated  below  : — 

{a)  Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  ivho  propose  to  spend  but  four 
years  in  college  may  take  practical  music,  provided  that  they  obtain 
each  year  the  permission  of  the  Dean  of  the  College  as  well  as  of 
the  Professor  of  Music ;  they  must  also  take  musical  theory  unless 
they  have  completed  two  three-hour  courses  in  the  subject.  This 
requirement  may  be  met,  however,  by  students  taking  courses  15, 
I,  and  14. 

*  Not  offered  in  1909-1910, 


124  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

(b)  Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  ivho  are  ^willing  to  de'vote 
fi've  years  to  the  college  course  will  be  permitted  to  take  practical 
music  each  year  of  the  course.  Freshmen  may  do  so  withovit  tak- 
ing Musical  Theoi-y,  but  all  other  students  in  the  academic  and 
musical  course  are  governed  by  the  restriction  laid  down  in  {a) . 

(c)  Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  wish  also  the  Certificate 
of  the  Department  of  Music  should  plan  to  devote  fi've  years  to  the 
college  course.  Such  students  are  required  to  take  practical  mvisic, 
two  lessons  a  week,  throughovit  the  five  ^-ears.  They  must  com- 
plete, satisfactorily  to  the  department,  a  course  in  the  literature  of 
the  instrument  chosen  or  of  the  voice;  they  must  apply  for  the  cer- 
tificate at  least  three  years  in  advance.  After  the  first  year  the  study 
of  Musical  Theory  is  required. 

(d)  Students  not  candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  ivho  desire  to 
specialize  in  Music  must  meet  the  requirements  prescribed  for  ad- 
mission to  the  freshman  class,  and  must  in  addition  pass  an  exam- 
ination on  the  rudiments  of  music.  This  examination  will  be  based 
upon  W.  H.  Cummings's  Rudiments  of  Music  (No.  2  of  Novello 
Company's  Music  Primers) ,  chapters  6,  9,  and  10  omitted.  Special 
students  must  take  both  Musical  Theory  and  vocal  or  instrumental 
lessons,  two  a  week,  with  not  less  than  twelve  hours  of  weekly 
practice.  They  must  also  take  from  six  to  nine  hours  per  week  of 
academic  work,  including  Musical  Theory,  as  may  be  decided  in 
consultation  with  the  Dean. 

{e)  Students  not  candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  who  wish  the 
Certificate  of  the  Department  of  Music  must  comply  with  the  con- 
ditions laid  down  in  (<:/);  moreover  the  academic  work  taken  must 
include  modern  languages.  Such  students  must  apply  for  the  cer- 
tificate on  entering  the  department,  and  must  have  already  acquired 
the  fundamental  technique  of  the  instrument  chosen  or  of  the  voice. 
The  time  occupied  in  study  for  the  certificate  depends  upon  the 
talent,  upon  the  proficiency  of  the  student  at  entrance,  and  upon 
her  subsequent  diligence;  but  in  general  fovir  years  at  least  are  nec- 
essary. The  various  courses  are  so  arranged  that  the  pupil  on  com- 
pletion will  have  an  acquaintance  with  the  best  musical  literature. 

(f)  Graduates  of  Wellesley  College  or  of  other  institutions  may 
make  special  arrangement  for  instrumental  or  vocal  lessons. 

{g)  Permission  to  practice  in  Music  Hall  cannot  be  given  to 
students  not  regularly  registered  in  the  department. 

{h)  Students  whose  progress  is  not  satisfactory  may  be  required 
to  discontinue  their  lessons. 

For  tuition  and  other  charges  in  the  Department  of  Music 
see  page  141. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  125 

COMPARATIVE   PHILOLOGY 

Associate  Professor:  Katharine   May  Edwards.  Ph.D. 

PROFESSOR:   HENRIETTE    LOUISE    ThERESE    COLIN,   Ph.D.,   OFF.   I.    P. 

Associate  Professors:  Laura  Emma  Lockwood,  Ph.D., 
Natalie  Wipplinger,  Ph.D. 

t  I .     General  Introduction  to  the  Science  of  Language.     III. 

Open  to  seniors,  and  to  juniors  by  pertnission  of  the  in- 
structor.     T'wo  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

Lectures  on  the  origin  and  nature  of  language  and  prin- 
ciples of  its  life  and  growth ;  outline  studies  in  phonetics  ; 
classification  of  languages  ;  groups  of  Indo-European  lan- 
guages with  chief  characteristics. 

*5.     Sanskrit.     III. 

open  to  graduates  only.      One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Edwards. 

1 6.     Gothic.     (German  26.)     III. 

Open  to  graduates  only.      Three  hours  a  iveek  for  the 
f-rst  semester. 

Miss  Wipplinger. 

Reading  of  Ulfilas,  with  constant  reference  to  the  syn- 
tax, phonology,  and  etymology  of  the  language.  Pres- 
entation of  fundamental  principals  in  Germanic  Philology. 

8.     Old  English  (English  Language  4).     III. 

Ope7i  to  graduates,  and  to  seniors  by  permission  of  the 
department.      Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Lockwood. 

A  study  of  Old  English  inflections,  phonology,  and  syn- 
tax. The  reading  of  the  best  pieces  of  literature  in  Old 
English  prose  and  poetry.  A  particular  problem  in  either 
literature  or  language  is  assigned  to  each  student  for 
investigation. 

t  Withdrawn  for  the  current  year. 
*Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


126  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

9.     Old  French  (French  11).     III. 

Ope7i  to  graduates,  and  to  seniors  by  -permission  of  the 
department.      Three  hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Madame  Colin. 

A  stud}^  of  Old  French  in  numerous  old  texts  with  a 
consideration  of  the  general  laws  of  its  phonetic  develop- 
ment from  Latin  to  French,  and  the  evolution  of  its  syntax. 

Lectures,  critical  reading,  papers  on  special  subjects. 


PHILOSOPHY  AND   PSYCHOLOGY 

Professor:  Mary  Whiton  Calkins,  M.A.,  Litt.D. 
Associate  Professors:  Mary  Sophia  Case.  B.A., 

Eleanor  Acheson   McCulloch  Gamble,  Ph.D. 
Instructor:  Helen  Dodd  Cook,  Ph.D. 

ASSISTANT:  SaRAH   JONES   WOODWARD,    B.A. 

Graduate  Assistants:  Theresa  Severin,  B.A., 
Ruby  Willis,  B.A. 

LECTURER:   JOHN    DEWEY,  PH.D.,  LL.D. 

The  requirement  in  philosophy  for  a  degree  is  met  by  course  7  (full 
year  course),  or  by  course  i  (first  semester)  followed  in  the  same  year 
by  course  6  or  course  16  (second  semester).  Courses  6  and  16  are  open 
also  as  elective  courses,  but  they  may  not  both  be  elected  by  a  student 
who  has  completed  or  is  carrying  course  7. 

The  department  offers  direction  to  graduate  students  in  independent 
work  in  psychology  and  in  philosophy,  and  conducts  graduate  confer- 
ences with  individual  students  at  stated  times. 

Logic.     I. 

Open  to  sophomores  and  Juniors  who  are  taking  course  i 
or  course  7  in  Philosophy^  or  course  2  or  course  4  in  Eng- 
lish Cotnposition.     One  hour  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Gamble. 

Training  in  argument  and  in  logical  criticism.  Work 
expressly  designed  to  meet  the  practical  needs  of  the  stu- 
dent. The  course  deals  not  only  with  the  principles  of 
deductive  logic,  but  also  with  elementary  questions  of 
observation  and  testimony,  and  of  scientific,  statistical, 
and  legal  evidence. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  127 


Psychology 

Courses  i  and 7  are  not  both  open  to  the  same  student. 
For  description  of  the  Psychology  Laboratory,  see  page  155. 

7.     Introductory  Course  in  Experimental  Psychology.     I. 

Open  to  sophomores, j'mnors,  and  seniors.      Three  hours 
a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Gamble. 

This  course  aims  to  insure  to  students  an  acquaintance 
with  primary  mental  facts,  to  give  them  a  definite  notion 
of  the  topics  treated  and  of  the  experimental  and  statisti- 
cal methods  employed  in  psychology,  and  to  fit  them  for 
more  advanced  psychological  work.  Text-books  :  Calkins, 
A  First  Book  in  Psychology ;  Titchener,  A  Text-book  of 
Psychology.  Laboratory  Manual :  Seashore,  Eleine?ttary 
Experitnenis  in  Psychology. 

The  work  in  psychology  will  be  supplemented  by  a  brief 
course  introductory  to  philosophical  study.  Berkeley's 
Dialogues  betiveen  Hylas  and  Philonous  will  be  read. 

I.     Introduction  to  Psychology.     I. 

Open  to  sophomores ,  junior s ,  and  seniors.      Three  hours 
a  -week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Calkins,  Miss  Cook. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  the  study  of  consciousness 
regarded  as  the  relation  of  self  to  environment.  The 
course  should  furnish  a  basis  for  the  study  of  ethics,  of 
pedagogy,  or  of  metaphysics.  Calkins  :  A  First  Book  in 
Psychology ;  James:  Psychology,  Briefer  Course. 

18.     Advanced  Course  in  General  Experimental  Psychology. 
III. 

Open  to  graduate  students,  arid,  by  permission,  to  other 

students  -who  have  completed  course  7  or  course  i.      Three 

hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Cook. 

The  purpose  of  this  course  is  to  offer  thorough  training 
in  experimentation  as  demonstrative  of  the  principal  facts 
and  theories  of  normal  psychology.  Special  stress  will 
be  laid  upon  the  use  of  apparatus.     The  course  is  designed 


128  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

to  meet  the  needs  of  those  who  expect  to  teach  psychol- 
ogy, or  to  engage  in  advanced  psychological  research. 
Titchener  :  Experime?ital  Psychology. 

14.  Reading  and  Research  Course  in  Psychology.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  7,  and  to 
students  -who  have  completed,  or  ivho  are  taking, 
course  18.     Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Gamble. 

Investigation,  experimental  or  statistical,  by  individual 
students  of  special  problems;  written  reports. 

15.  Second  Research  Course  in  Pyschology.     III. 

Open  to  graduate  students,  and  to  others  by  permission, 
as  a  fourth  course  in  psychology.  Three  hours  a  -week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Gamble. 


Philosopliy 

Courses  2  and  4  are  not  both  given  in  the  same  year.  Only  one  of 
the  three  courses,  11,  12,  and  13,  will  ordinarily  be  offered  in  the  same 
year. 

16.     Social  Ethics.     I. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  ivho  have  completed  course  i 
or  the  first  semester  of  course  7.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Case. 

Ethics  approached  from  the  social  side.  Lectures  on 
social  psychology  and  on  the  scope  of  social  philosophy, 
the  nature  of  society  and  social  institutions,  and  the 
nature  of  the  good.  Reading  of  ethical  texts,  primarily 
of  Plato's  Republic. 

6.     Introduction  to  Philosophy.     I. 

Open  to  sophomores,  juniors.^  and  seniors  who  have  com- 
pleted course  i  or  the  first  semester  of  course  7.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  Calkins,  Miss  Cook. 

The  aim  of  this  course  is  the  discussion  of  metaphysical 

problems,  such  as  the  relation  of  spirit  to  matter,  and  the 

conception    of   causality.     The   discussion   will    be  based 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  129 

upon  Descartes's  Meditations^  selections  from  Hobbes's 
Concerning  Body,  and  Berkeley's  Pri7icij>l€S  of  Human 
Knowledge  and  Dialogues  between  Hylas  and  Philonous. 
Calkins's  The  Persistent  Problems  of  Philosophy  is  used 
for  reference. 

lo.     Greek  Philosophy.     II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  -who  have  completed  or  -who 
are  taking  course  i  or  course  7.      Three  hours  a  -iveek  for 

a  year. 

Miss  Case. 

Text  study,  lectures,  discussions.  Fragments  of  the 
pre-Socratic  philosophers  ;  Xenophon's  Memorabilia  (se- 
lections) ;  Plato  :  most  of  the  dialogues,  either  complete  or 
in  part,  with  critical  study  of  the  more  important  pas- 
sages ;  Aristotle :  Metaphysics  or  Psychology,  extended 
passages.     Lectures  on  post-Aristotelian  philosophy. 

9.     Second  Course  in  Modern  Philosophy.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  -who  are  taking  course  10  and  to  seniors. 
Three  hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Calkins. 

Lectures  and  discussions.  Text  study  of  Leibniz's  Dis- 
course on  Metaphysics,  and  other  writings;  Hume's  En- 
quiry, and  Treatise,  selections  from  Book  I ;  Kant's 
Critique  of  Pure  Reason  (with  omissions),  and  selections 
from  his  ethical  works ;  Spinoza's  Ethics  and  Fichte's 
V^ocation  of  Man.  Lectures  on  the  philosophy  of  Kant 
and  of  the  post-Kantian  German  philosophers,  and  on 
problems  of  metaphysics. 

*2.     Esthetics.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors  -who  are  taking  a  full  elective 
course  in  the  department.      One  hour  a  week  for  a  year. 
In   1908-1909,  first    semester :   principles   of    aesthetics ; 
second  semester  :  systems  of  sesthetics. 

4.     Contemporary  Tendencies  in  Psychology  and  in  Philoso- 
phy.    III. 

open  to  juniors  and  seniors  who  are  taking  a  full  elective 

course  in  the  departtnent.     One  hour  a  xveek  for  a  year. 

Members  of  the  department  and  other  lecturers. 

*Not  offered  in  1909-1919. 


130  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

Lectures  and  discussions  on  such  subjects  as  { i)  the  rela- 
tion of  psychology  to  the  other  sciences  and  to  philosophy, 
the  special  purposes  of  the  various  psycho-phj'sical  meth- 
ods, theories  of  "the  subconscious";  (2)  pragmatism, 
contemporary  pluralistic  systems,  contemporary  monistic 
systems. 

II.     Advanced  Course  in  Modern  Philosophy.     III. 

Of  en  as  the  fourth  course  of  a  major  subject  Prerequi- 
sites must  be  arranged  ivith  the  department.  Three 
hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Case,  Miss  Calkins. 

Lectures,  reports  of  special  study,  discussions.  Subject 
varied  from  year  to  year.  In  1909-1910,  first  semester : 
text  study  of  Hegel's  smaller  Logic  ;  second  semester : 
study  of  contemporary  criticisms  of  idealism. 

*  12.     Philosophy  of  Religion.     III. 

Ope7i  as  the  fourth  course  of  a  major  subject.  Prere- 
quisites jnust  be  arranged  ivith  the  department.  Three 
hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Case,  Miss  Calkins. 

Subject  varied  from  year  to  year.  In  1908-1909,  the 
work  was  based  on  Hegel's  Philosophy  of  Religion. 

*  13.     Historical  Studies  in  Ethics.     III. 

Open  as  the  fourth  course  of  a  major  subject.  Pre- 
requisites must  be  arranged  -with  the  department.  Three 
hours  a  iveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  Case,  Miss  Calkins. 
Subject  varied  from   year  to  year.     In    1907-1908 :  the 
ethical  systems  of  Hegel  and  Aristotle,  as  related  to  their 
metaphysical  doctrines. 

19.  Constructive  Treatment  of  Problems  in  Metaphysics.  III. 
Open,  by  permission,  to  graduate  students.  Three  hours 
a  week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Calkins. 

Subject  for  1909-1910:  contemporary  realism.  Discus- 
sions, constructive  in  aim,  based  on  Fullerton,  A  System 
of  Metaphysics.     Collateral  Reading. 

♦Not  oflered  in  1909-1910. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  131 

20.     Special  Historical  Studies  in  Philosophy.     III. 

Open,  by  permission ,  to  graduate  students.      Three  hours 
a  -week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Case. 
Subject  in  1909-1910  :  Aristotle's  Metaphysics. 


PHYSICS 

PROFESSOR:    SARAH    FRANCES  WHITING,    D.SC. 

Associate  Professor:  Grace  Evangeline  Davis,  M.A. 

Instructor:  Louise  Sherwood  McDowell,  Ph.D. 
Assistant:  Margaret  E.  Sawtelle,  B.A. 
Graduate  Assistant:  Ernestine  Wells  Fuller,  B.A. 

1.  General  Physics.     I. 

Open  to  all  undergraduates.  Three  hours  a  -week  for  a 
year. 

Miss  McDowell,  Miss  Sawtelle,  Miss  Fuller. 

This  course  consists  of  lectures  illustrated  with  many 
experiments,  followed  by  laboratory  work.  The  elemen- 
tary principles  of  Mechanics,  Sound,  Electricity,  Light 
are  outlined.  Special  attention  is  given  to  the  explanation 
of  the  phenomena  of  everyday  life. 

2.  Outline  Physics.     I. 

Open  only  to  students  in  the  department  of  Physical  Ed- 
ucation.    Three  hours  a  -week  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  McDowell. 
This   course,  which   consists   of   experimental   lectures 
followed  by  recitations,  takes  up  more  briefly  than  course 
I  the  fundamental  conceptions  of  Physics. 

3.  Heat,  Light,  and  Electricity.     II. 

open  to  sophomores^  juniors,  and  seniors  who  have  com- 
pleted course  i  or  an  equivalent.  Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Davis. 

This  course  presupposes  an  acquaintance  with  the  gen- 
eral principles  of  Physics,  and  aims  to  be  intensive  in  its 


132      <?  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

work.  Only  the  best  instruments  of  precision  are  used, 
and  training  is  given  in  the  handling  of  apparatus  and  in 
the  discussion  of  results. 

Special  attention  is  given  to  the  needs  of  those  prepar- 
ing to  teach. 

4.  Light  and  Electricity,  mathematically  treated.     III. 

Open  to  juniors  and  to  setiiors  ivho  have  completed  course 
J  and  also  course  i  in  Applied  Mathematics  or  course  3 
in  Pure  Mathematics.      Three  hours  a  xveek  for  a  year. 

Miss  McDowell. 

Text-books  :  J.  J.  Thomson's  Mathe7natical  Theory  of 
Light  and  Electricity.,  first  semester ;  Edser's  Light  for 
Students.,  second  semester,  w^ith  reference  reading. 

It  is  possible  to  combine  one  semester  of  this  course 
with  either  5  or  8. 

5.  Advanced  Optics.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  course  3.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  secotid  setnester. 

Miss  Whiting,  Miss  Davis. 

Polarized  light,  measurement  of  wave  lengths  with 
plane  grating,  mapping  spectra  with  filar  micrometer, 
photographing  spectra  with  concave  grating  spectroscope 
through  color  screens,  measurement  of  photographs  with 
measuring  machine,  work  with  interferometer. 

8.     Advanced  Electricity.     III. 

Open  to  students  -who  have  completed  course  3.  Three 
hours  a  xveek  for  the  first  semester. 

Miss  Whiting,  Miss  Davis. 

Precise  measurements  of  electrical  units,  Hertzian  waves, 
discharge  through  gases.  Roentgen  ray  photography,  radio- 
activity, modern  theories. 

The  aim  of  courses  5  and  8  is  to  present  modern  theories, 
with  evidence  for  them  gathered  from  individual  work  and 
consultation  of  original  memoirs,  and  to  develop  the 
power  of  independent  thought  and  experiment. 


1909-10  Courses  of  Instruction  133 

6.     Meteorology.     II. 

Oj>e7i  to  sophomores^  juniors^  and  seniors  -who  have  com- 
pleted course  i  or  an  equivalent.  One  hour  a  iveek  for  a 
year. 

Miss  Davis. 

Text-books :  Davis's  Aleteorology,  Ward's  Practical 
Exercises.  Making  of  weather  maps ;  study  of  clovids, 
cold  waves,  progress  of  storms,  weather  prediction. 


SPANISH 

INSTRUCTOR:    CAROLINA    MARCIAL,    B.A. 

t  I.     Elementary  Course.     I. 

Open  to  sophomores,  ju?iiors,  and  seniors.    Three  hours  a 

-week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Marcial. 

Drill  in  pronunciation  and  elements  of  the  language. 
Sauer  :  Grammar ;  Bonilla  :  Spanish  Daily  Life  ;  prepared 
and  sight  translations,  oral  exercises;  Doce  Cuentos  JSsco- 
gidos ;  Alarc6n  :  El  Capitdn  Veneno ;  Galdos  :  Maria- 
?iela  ;  Becquer  :  Leyejidas  y  Poesias  Escogidas.  Themes, 
reports  and  collateral  reading  on  Spanish  subjects. 

3.     Intermediate  Course.     II. 

Open  to  students  who  have   completed  course  i .      Three 
hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Marcial. 

Grammar  of  the  Spanish  Academy.  Modern  Literature. 
Valera  :  El  Pdjdro  Verde  y  Pasarse  de  Listo ;  Gald6s  : 
Dona  Perfecta  ;  Echegaray  :  El  Gran  Galeoto  ;  Palacios 
Valdes  :  La  Hermatia  San  Suipicio.  Mediaeval  Literature. 
Authors  of  the  Golden  Age ;  Cervantes :  Extracts  from 
Don  ^uijote ;  Calderon :  La  Vida  es  Sueno ;  Lope  de 
Vega;  La  Estrella  de  Sevilla ;  Extracts  from  the  Cid ; 
Ballads   and  Legends. 

X  After  190Q-1910  this  course   if   taken  in  the  senior  year  may  not  count  within 
the  minimum  number  of  hours  prescribed  for  a  degfree. 


134  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

ZOOLOGY  AND   PHYSIOLrOGY 

PROFESSOR:    MARY    ALICE   WiLLCOX.   PH.D. 

Associate  Professors:  Marion  Elizabeth  Hubbard,  B.S.. 

Caroline  Burling  Thompson,  Ph.D., 
Alice  Robertson,  Ph.D. 
Instructors:  Carrie  Maud  Holt,  M.A., 

Margaret  Harris  Cook,  Ph.D., 
Frederick  Haven  Pratt,  A.M.,  M.D., 
Mabel  Louise  Robinson,  M.A. 
Curators  :  Albert  Pitts  Morse, 

Julia  Ann  Wood  Hewitt.  B.A. 

1.  The  Biology  of  Animals.     I. 

Open  to  freshmen  and  sophomores.      Three  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Miss  Hubbard,  Miss  Robertson, 
Miss  Holt,  Miss  Cook. 

This  course  is  conducted  bj  lectures  and  laboratory  and 
field  work. 

The  student  becomes  familiar  with  a  series  of  types  of 
invertebrates  and  with  one  vertebrate,  the  frog.  Each 
animal  is  studied  in  its  structure,  physiology,  life  history, 
and  economic  importance,  and  in  addition  attention  is 
directed  to  its  haunts,  its  food,  its  instincts  and  habits  and 
its  adaptations  to  its  surroundings. 

The  study  of  birds  constitutes  a  part  of  the  work. 

This  course  aims  to  train  the  student  in  accurate  obser- 
vation. Attention  is  directed  continually  to  fundamental 
biological  principles,  special  emphasis  being  placed  on  the 
facts  of  evolution. 

2.  Zoology  of  Vertebrates.     II. 

Open  to  juniors  and  seniors.,  and  to  sophomores  who  have 
completed  course  i.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Willcox,  Miss  Cook, 
Miss  Robinson. 

This  course  aims  to  do  for  the  vertebrates  much  what 
course  i  does  for  the  invertebrates.  It  is  opened  by  a 
careful  and  detailed  study  of  the  dogfish  as  a  type  of  the 
group,  followed   by  briefer  study  of  the  smelt  or  herring. 


1909-10 


Courses  of  Instruction  135 


This  work  on  aquatic  vertebrates  is  succeeded  by  similar 
studies  of  amphibious,  aerial,  and  terrestial  ones.  The 
aim  throughout  is  both  to  trace  the  progressive  modifica- 
tions of  the  vertebrate  type,  together  with  those  adapta- 
tions which  fit  its  members  for  varying  modes  of  life,  and 
also  to  point  out  the  relations  between  human  structure 
and  that  of  the  lower  vertebrates. 

Courses  i  and  2  together  will  meet  the   requirement  in 
Biology  of  the  Johns  Hopkins  Medical  School. 

*  5.     Advanced  Invertberate  Zoology.     III. 

Open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  2, 
and  -with  the  approval  of  the  head  of  the  department,  to 
juniors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  xveek  for  the  first  semester,  ^    ^     , 

Miss  Robertson. 

Lectures,  laboratory  and  field  work  with  special  refer- 
ence to  local  fauna,  both  marine  and  fresh  water.  Prima- 
rily for  those  intending  to  teach  Zoology. 

6.     Philosophical  Zoology.     III. 

Open,  with  the  advice  of  the  head  of  the  department,  to 
students  who  have  taken  course  2  and  one  other  course. 
Three  hours  a  week  for  the  year. 

Miss  Willcox. 

Theoretical  problems  of  biology.  Lectures  on  evolution, 
variation,  and  heredity,  the  discussion  of  these  together 
with  related  facts,  and  current  biological  theories. 

*7.     Insects.     III. 

open  to  students  who  have  completed  courses  i  and  2, 
and.  with  the  approval  of  the  head  of  the  department,  to 
ju?tiors  and  seniors  who  have  completed  course  i.  Three 
hours  a  week  for  the  second  semester. 

Miss  ihompson. 

Lectures,  laboratory,  and  field  work  with  reference  to 
the  different  groups  of  insects  and  especially  the  coni- 
moner  forms.  Primarily  for  those  intending  to  teach 
Zoology. 

*  Not  offered  in  1909-1910. 


136  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

8.     Embryology  and  Cell  Structure.     III. 

open  to  juniors  and  settlors  -who  have  completed  or  are 
taking  course  2.      Three  hours  a  week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Thompson. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work  upon  the  structure  of 
animal  cells  and  tissues,  the  embryology  of  the  chick  and 
certain  other  vertebrates.  Instruction  in  technique  forms 
a  part  of  the  laboratory  work. 

lo.     Physiology.     III. 

Open  to  students  -who  have   completed  course  2.      Three 
hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Miss  Robertson. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work  dealing  with  experimental 
and  theoretical  questions  in  Human  Physiology.  Each 
student  arranges  and  uses  the  apparatus  necessary  for 
almost  all  experiments;  the  instructor,  however,  performs 
some  of  the  more  difficult  ones,  assisted  in  turn  by  the 
different  members  of  the  class. 


Special  Courses  for  Students    in    the   Department  of  Hygiene 
and  Physical  Education 

11.  Anatomy. 

Open  only  to  first-year  students  in  the  Department  of 
Hygiene  and  Physical  Education.  Four  hours  a  week 
for  a  year. 

Mr.  Pratt,  Miss  Holt. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work  upon  the  anatomy  of  the 
muscles,  viscera,  circulator}^  and  nervous  systems.  Ele- 
ments of  histology. 

12.  Physiology  and  Hygiene. 

Open  only  to  students  in  the  Department  of  Hygiene  and 
Physical  Education  -who  have  completed  course  u.  Four 
hours  a  -week  for  a  year. 

Mr.  Pratt,  Miss  Holt. 

Lectures  and  laboratory  work  dealing  with  Physiology 
and  its  application  to  Hygiene. 


1909-10  Degrees  137 


COLfLEGE   EXAMINATIONS 

An  examination  period  occurs  at  the  end  of  each  semester. 
At  these  periods,  and  also  during  the  days  of  the  admission 
examinations  in  September,  examinations  for  the  removal  of 
conditions  and  deficiencies  and  for  advanced  standing  may  be 
taken. 

A  student  who  wishes  to  take  an  examination  upon  a  course 
which  is  not  a  part  of  her  approved  schedule  for  the  year,  must 
apply  to  the  Dean  for  the  requisite  card  of  admission  to  the  exam- 
ination. The  last  day  for  receiving  applications  for  such  cards  is 
for  the  September  examinations,  September  first:  for  the  mid-year 
examinations,  January  first:  for  the  June  examinations,  May  fifteenth. 

N.  B.  Examinations  for  the  removal  of  conditions  and  deficien- 
cies excepted,  no  student  can  be  admitted  to  examination  upon  a 
course  which  is  not  a  part  of  her  approved  schedule  for  the  year 
without  permission  both  from  the  Head  of  the  Department  con- 
cerned and  the  Dean  of  the  College.  No  student,  therefore,  should 
enter  upon  preparation  for  such  an  examination  until  her  plan  has 
been  appro<ved  by  both  of  the  abo've  named  officers. 

Ky  The  College  reserves  the  right  to  require  the  withdrawal 
of  students  whose  scholarship  is  not  satisfactory. 

DEGREES 

The  following  degrees  are  conferred  by  the  Trustees  upon 
recommendation  of  the  Academic  Council : — 
Bachelor  of  Arts. 
Master  of  Arts. 

REQUIREMENTS    FOR    THE    B.A.  DEGREE 

Every  candidate  for  the  B.A.  degree  must  complete  before 
graduation  the  equivalent  of  fifty- eight  hours.*  Since  1896, 
two  grades  in  work  which  reaches  the  passing  mark  have  been 
distinguished:    one,    ''Passed'';     the    other,    ''Passed    with 

*This  requirement  of  fifty-eight  instead  of  fifty-seven  hours  applies  to  the  class 
•f  191 1  and  all  succeeding  classes. 


138  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

CreditJ^  In  order  to  be  recommended  for  the  degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts,  a  student  must  have  "  passed  with  credit  "  in 
at  least  thirty-four  hours,  of  which  nine  hours  have  been 
accompHshed  in  the  junior  and  nine  in  the  senior  year.  First- 
year  French  and  first-year  German  may  not  both  be  counted 
among  the  fifty-eight  hours.  Neither  first-year  French  nor 
first-year  German  may  be  so  counted  if  taken  after  the  sopho- 
more year,  and  neither  second-year  French  nor  second-year 
German  if  taken  after  the  junior  year.  Of  the  fifty-eight  hours 
required  for  the  B.A.  degree,  a  certain  number  is  prescribed, 
the  rest  elective. 

I.     Prescribed.     The   following   subjects  are  required   as 
specified  : — 

Biblical  History         .... 
English  Composition 

Mathematics 

Language  (unless  a  third  language 

has  been  presented  for  admission) 

or 

Natural    Science    (if   not  presented 

for  admission )        .         .         .         . 
A  Second  Natural  Science 
Philosophy         ..... 
Physiology  and  Hygiene 


Of  the  required  subjects,  Mathematics  must  be  taken  in  the 
freshman  year;  Physiology  and  Hygiene  in  the  freshman  year; 
Biblical  History  two  hours  per  week  in  the  sophomore  and  the 
junior  years  ;  English  two  hours  per  week  in  the  freshman  and  the 
sophomore  years.  Of  the  natural  sciences,  one  must  be  taken  before 
the  junior  year,  but  either  a  language  or  a  science  must  be  taken 
in  the  freshman  year.  Philosophy  should  ordinarily  be  taken  before 
the  senior  year. 

Three  periods  per  week  in  Physical  Education  are  required  in 
the  freshman  and  sophomore  years. 

II.  Elective.  All  courses  are  classified  in  Grades  I,  II, 
III ;  Grade  I  including  elementary  courses  and  Grade  III  the 


4 

hours. 

4 
4 

(( 

-  3 

1 

" 

1 
3 

3 

I 

22 

hour, 
hours. 

1909-10  Degrees  139 

most  advanced  courses.  All  of  the  fifty-eight  hours  not  indi- 
cated in  the  above  are  elective,  subject  only  to  the  restriction 
that  every  candidate  for  the  B.A.  degree  must  show  before 
graduation  that  she  has  completed  either 

(i)  nine  hours  in  each  of  two  departments,  related  or 
unrelated,  or 

(2)  twelve  hours  in  one  department  and  six  hours  in  a 
second  department,  related  or  unrelated. 

Of  the  courses  offered  to  fulfill  this  requirement,  at  least 
one  full  course  of  Grade  III  must  be  taken  in  the  senior  year. 
The  nine-hour  groups  must  consist  of  at  least  six  hours  above 
Grade  I,  three  hours  of  which  must  be  of  Grade  III.  The 
twelve-hour  groups  must  consist  of  at  least  nine  hours  above 
Grade  I,  six  hours  of  which  must  be  of  Grade  III.  The  six- 
hour  groups  must  include  at  least  three  hours  above  Grade  I. 

REQUIREMENTS    FOR    THE    M.A.    DEGREE 

Candidates  for  the  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  must  be  grad- 
uates of  Wellesley  College,  or  of  some  other  institution  of 
satisfactory  standing,  and  must  give  evidence  of  ability  to  carry 
on  the  work  for  the  Master's  degree. 

The  work  required  of  a  candidate  for  the  Master's  degree 
is  equivalent  to  fifteen  hours  of  college  work,  and  includes  no 
fewer  than  nine  nor  more  than  twelve  hours  of  regular  class 
work.  A  thesis,  or  a  report  or  reports,  based  on  independent 
work  will  be  required.  The  student  should  choose  one  major 
subject,  and  not  more  than  one  minor  subject,  which  should 
be  related  to  the  major ;  or  she  may,  if  she  prefers,  do  all  her 
work  in  one  subject.  A  candidate  for  the  Master's  degree  is 
required  to  show  such  a  reading  knowledge  of  French  and  of 
German  as  is  satisfactory  to  the  department  in  which  the 
major  subject  is  taken. 

One  year  is  the  shortest  time  in  which  a  candidate  can  com- 
plete the  work  required,  but  it  must  be  understood  that  only 
students  of  ability  and  maturity  will  be  able  to  finish  it  in  so 
short  a  time. 


140  Wellesley  College  1909-1© 

The  v/ork  for  the  degree  of  Master  of  Arts  will  be  tested  by 
either  examination  or  thesis,  or  by  both.  Rules  regarding 
examinations  of  resident  students  are  fully  stated  in  the  grad- 
uate circular.  Non-resident  students  will  be  examined  in 
Wellesley  during  some  one  of  the  regular  examination  periods 
of  the  year  in  which  the  degree  is  to  be  conferred. 

Thirty  scholarships,  as  described  on  page  146,  are  open  to 
accepted  candidates  for  the  Master's  degree  not  residing  in 
college  buildings.  Applications  for  these  scholarships  should 
be  accompanied  by  records  of  standing,  and,  if  possible,  by 
papers  or  reports  of  work.  Candidates  residing  in  the  college 
buildings  will  pay  the  full  charge  for  board  and  tuition.  A 
matriculation  fee  of  five  dollars  is  payable  when  a  student  is 
accepted  as  a  candidate  for  the  Master's  degree  ;  for  a  gradu- 
ate student  without  a  scholarship  it  will  be -deducted  from  the 
first  tuition  fee ;  for  a  graduate  student  with  a  scholarship  it 
will  be  deducted  from  the  diploma  fee.  The  diploma  fee  of 
twenty- five  dollars  is  payable  when  the  degree  is  received. 

A  graduate  of  Wellesley  College  who  has  done  the  entire 
work  for  the  Master's  degree  in  non-residence  is  accepted  as 
candidate  for  this  degree  when  this  work  has  been  done  at 
some  institution  which  does  not  grant  the  Master's  degree  to 
women.  Any  graduate  student  is  allowed,  with  the  advice  or 
the  approval  of  the  department  concerned,  to  offer  toward  the 
Master's  degree  one  or  two  courses  carried  not  in  Wellesley 
College  but  in  some  approved  college  or  university.  Prepara- 
tion for  the  degree  by  private  study  is  not  permitted.  The 
diploma  fee  is  the  same  for  resident  and  non-resident  students. 

Circulars  containing  statement  of  graduate  courses  and  fuller 
information  concerning  graduate  work  will  be  forwarded  on 
application  to  the  Dea^i  of  the  College.  It  is  desirable  that 
applications  for  admission  as  graduate  students  be  received  by 
June  I  St  of  the  year  in  which  the  student  wishes  to  enter. 


1909-10  Expenses  141 

EXPENSES 

TUITION^ 

The  charge  for  tuition  to  all  students,  whether  living  in  col- 
lege buildings  or  not,  is  $ij$  a  year.  Tuition  is  payable  in 
advance  and  is  not  subject  to  return  or  deduction. 

Students  who  are  permitted  to  take  seveji  hours  or  /ess  of  class- 
room work  a  week,  and  who  do  7iot  live  in  college  buildittgs,  pay 
tuition  by  the  course  as  follows  :  for  a  one-hour  course,  $20 ;  a  two- 
hour  course,  $40  ;  a  three-hour  course,  $60.  Payment  is  due  at  the 
beginning  of  the  year.  No  charge  is  made  for  tuition  in  Biblical 
History. 

TUITIOIS^    AISTI)    OTHER    CHARGES    IK 
DEPARTMENT    OF    MUSIC 

For  instruction  for  the  college  year  in  Pianoforte, 
Organ,  Violin  or  Vocal  Music,  two  lessons  a 
week+ $100  00 

One  lesson  a  week 5°  00 

(Lessons  thirty  minutes  in  length.) 

For  use  of  the  Pianoforte,  sixty  minutes  daily,  for  the 

college  year  .......  10  00 

For  two  and  three  hours  daily,  in  proportion.  ^ 

For  use  of  the  Pipe  Organ  in  Music  Hall,  sixty  min- 
utes daily,  for  the  college  year    .         .         .         .  15  00 

For  two  or  three  hours  daily,  in  proportion. 

Special  arrangements  may  be  made  for  lessons  on  instruments 

not  mentioned  above. 

Tuition  in  music  must  always  be  paid  in  advance  and  is  not 

subject  to  return  or  deduction. 

BOARD 

The  charge  for  board  to  students  lodging  in  halls  of  resi- 
dence is  ^275. 

5^^  It  will  be  seen  from  the  above  statements  that  the  total 
annual  charge  (for  both  board  and  tuition^  is  $\^o. 

t  The  change  in  these  rates  applies  to  all  students  taking  practical  music  for 
the  first  time  in  1909-1910  and  thereafter. 


142  VV^ELLESLEY    CoLLEGE  1909-10 

FIXED    TIMES    AND    AMOUNTS    OF 

PAYMENTS 

1,  For  students  who  are  lodged  in  college  buildings. 
Students  who  are   lodged  in  college   buildings  make  pay- 
ments as  follows  : — 

September  (at  the  opening  of  college)  .         .         .  $250 

February  (at  the  beginning  of  the  second  semester)  200 

Total  of  these  payments  for  the  year      .         .  $450 

The  charge  for  board  begins  at  the  opening  of  dormitories,  i.  e., 
twenty-four  hours  before  the  close  of  registration  (see  page  5),  and 
students  are  not  permitted  to  occupy  rooms  in  dormitories  before 
that  time. 

2,  For  students  who  are  not  lodged  in  college  buildings. 
Students   who  are   not   lodged   in  college  buildings  make 

the  tuition  payment  ($175)  at   the  time  of  the  opening  in 
September. 

These  students  find  room  and  board  in  the  village  of  Wellesley. 
Payment  is  made  to  the  head  of  the  house  at  such  rates  and  times 
as  the  parties  to  the  contract  may  agree  upon.  Information  regard- 
ing boarding  places  may  be  obtained  by  addressing  the  Registrar. 

^^  Payments  must  be  made  before  the  student  can  take  her 
place  ifi  the  class  room.  No  exception  will  be  made  to  this 
rule  without  a  written  permission  from  the  Treasurer. 

^P"  Checks  or  mofiey  orders  should  be  made  payable  to 
Wellesley  College. 

FEES 

An  application  fee  of  $10  is  required  from  all  candidates  for 
admission,  and  no  application  is  recorded  until  the  fee  is  re- 
ceived (see  page  144).  The  same  fee  is  required  from  all 
students  in  college  who  are  intending  to  return  for  the  following 
year,  and  from  all  former  students  who  apply  for  re-admission. 
If  the  student  enters  college,  the  amount  of  the  application 
fee  is  deducted  from  the  first  tuition  bill  after  entrance.  If 
formal  notice  of  withdrawal  is  received  at  the  Dean's  ofifice  be- 
fore August  15  th  of  the  year  for  which  the  application  is  made, 


1909-10  Residence  143 

the  fee  will  be  refunded.  In  all  other  cases  it  is  forfeited  to 
the  College.  A  student  who  postpones  entrance  until  the  year 
following  the  one  for  which  she  first  applied  may  transfer  her 
application  fee.  But  a  fee  so  transferred  will  not  be  refunded 
if  the  student  later  decides  to  withdraw,  unless  the  request  for 
the  transfer  was  received  within  the  specified  time.  Requests 
for  second  transfers  are  sometimes  granted,  but  a  fee  transferred 
a  second  time  will  not  be  refunded  under  any  circumstances. 

An  infirmary  fee  of  five  dollars  is  charged  each  student. 
This  fee  covers  the  privileges  of  the  infirmary,  when  prescribed, 
for  a  period  not  to  exceed  fourteen  days.  This  fee  is  due  at 
the  beginning  of  the  year  at  the  time  of  the  first  payment  on 
account  of  board  and  tuition. 

An  additional  charge  is  made  for  materials  and  the  use  of 
apparatus  in  the  following  laboratory  courses  :  $5  for  each  lab- 
oratory course  in  Botany,  Chemistry,  Physics,  Zoology,  or  As- 
tronomy; ;^2.5o  for  the  course  in  Mineralogy;  ^5  each  for 
courses  9  and  10  in  Musical  Theory,  ^2.50  each  for  the  half 
courses  11  and  12  ;  ^2  each  for  the  studio  courses  in  Art,  and 
;^i  each  for  all  other  Art  courses.  Every  student  should  also 
reckon  on  the  expenditure  of  ^10  to  $25  annually  for  the  pur- 
chase of  books.  At  the  time  of  taking  the  degree  a  diploma 
fee  is  charged.  This  is  ^5  for  the  B.A.  degree,  and  $2$  for 
the  M.A.  degree. 

RESIDENCE 

College  Hall,  with  three'  dining  rooms,  accommodates  two 
hundred  and  twenty  persons  ;  Stone  Hall,  with  four  dining 
rooms,  one  hundred  and  five;  Shafer,  ninety-six;  Beebe, 
ninety-one  ;  Pomeroy,  seventy-seven  ;  Cazenove,  seventy-seven  ; 
Wilder,  fifty;  Freeman,  forty-nine;  Norumbega,  forty-eight; 
Wood,  forty-eight ;  Eliot,  twenty-nine  ;  Fiske,  thirty-five.  All 
the  rooms  are  furnished  and  supplied  with  electric  lights. 

Jl^-  A  student  vacating  a  roo7n  before  the  close  of  the  year, 
or  relinquishing  a  room  reserved  for  her  at  the  beginning  of 
the  year,  will  be  charged  for  board  until  the  vacancy  has  been 


144  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

filled  by  an  incoming  student.  Therefore,  notice  of  an  inten- 
tion to  withdraw  should  be  given  at  the  earliest  possible 
moment.     No  deduction  is  made  for  absences  during  the  year. 

All  applications  for  rooms  in  college  buildings  take  the  date 
at  which  the  application  fee  is  received.  (See  pages  25  and 
142.) 

Until  May  ist,  but  not  after  that  date,  applications  from 
foniier  students  will  take  precedence  of  those  of  new  students 
in  the  matter  of  rooms.  A  limited  number  of  students  can 
arrange  for  board  at  the  College  during  the  Christmas  and 
spring  vacations. 

^^  No  student  can  receive  a  diploma  until  a  satisfactory 
settlement  of  all  her  college  dues  has  been  made. 

HEAI.TH 

The  resident  physician,  Katharine  P.  Raymond,  B.S.,  M.D., 
together  with  the  Director  of  Physical  Education,  the  Director 
of  Halls  of  Residence,  and  the  President  and  the  Dean  of  the 
College,  ex  officio,  constitute  a  board  of  health  to  which  all 
matters  affecting  the  health  of  students  are  referred.  An 
infirmary  is  maintained  in  Simpson  Cottage  under  the  charge 
of  Dr.  Raymond.  Two  trained  nurses  are  in  constant  atten- 
dance. An  infirmary  fee  of  five  dollars  is  charged  each  stu- 
dent. This  fee  covers  the  privileges  of  the  infirmary  when 
prescribed  for  a  period  not  to  exceed  fourteen  days.  The 
services  of  the  Resident  Physician  for  consultation  and  treat- 
ment are  free  to  all  students. 

FELLOWSHIPS   AND   SCHOLARSHIPS 

A.      FOR  GRADUATES 

The  Alice  Freeman  Palmer  Fellowship,  yielding  an  in- 
come of  about  $1,000,  was  founded  in  1903,  by  Mrs.  David  P. 
Kimball. 

The  holder  of  this  Fellowship  must  be  a  graduate  of  Wellesley 
College  or  some  other  American  college  of  approved  standing,  a 
joving  woman  of  good  health,  not  more  than  twenty-six  years  of 


1909-10       Fellowships  and  Scholarships  145 

age  at  the  time  of  her  appointment,  unmarried  throughout  the 
whole  of  her  tenure,  and  as  free  as  possible  from  other  responsi- 
bilities. The  same  person  will  not  be  eligible  to  the  F'ellowship 
for  more  than  two  years. 

The  Fellowship  may  be  used  for  study  abroad,  for  study  at 
any  American  college  or  university,  or  privately  for  independent 
research.  But  several  times  during  the  period  of  tenure  the  holder 
of  the  fellowship  must  furnish  evidence  that  it  is  used  for  purposes 
of  serious  study  and  not  for  general  culture ;  and  within  three 
years  from  entrance  on  the  fellowship  she  must  present  to  the 
faculty  a  thesis  embodying  the  results  of  the  research  carried  on 
during  the  period  of  tenure. 

Applications  for  this  Fellowship  should  be  received  by  the 
President  of  Wellesley  College  not  later  than  February  ist,  of  the 
academic  year  preceding  that  for  which  the  Fellowship  is  asked. 

Scholarships  in  Schools  of  Classical  Study. — Student- 
ships in  the  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Athens, 
and  the  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Rome,  are 
open  to  graduates  and  graduate  students  of  Wellesley  College 
who  have  done  sufficient  work  in  the  classics  to  meet  the 
admission  requirements. 

The  object  of  these  schools  is  to  afford  opportunity  for  the 
study  of  classical  literature,  art,  and  antiquities,  to  aid  in  original 
research  in  these  subjects,  and  to  conduct  the  exploration  and 
excavation  of  classical  sites. 

The  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Athetis. — The  school 
year  extends  from  October  ist  to  June  ist.  The  regulations  for 
admission  are  as  follows:  "Bachelors  of  Arts  of  co-operating 
colleges,  and  all  Bachelors  of  Arts  who  have  studied  at  one  of 
these  colleges  as  candidates  for  a  higher  degree,  shall  be  admitted 
to  membership  in  the  School  on  presenting  to  the  Committee  a 
certificate  from  the  classical  department  of  the  college  at  which 
they  have  last  studied,  stating  that  they  are  competent  to  pursue 
an  independent  course  of  study  at  Athens  under  the  advice  of  the 
Director.  Members  of  the  School  are  subject  to  no  charge  for 
tuition."  *  Further  information  can  be  had  by  application  to 
Professor  Chapin,  who  represents  Wellesley  College  upon  the 
Managing  Committee  of  the  School. 

The  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  ijiRome. — The  school 

*  A  few  Fellowships  are  awarded  on  competitive  examination. 


146  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

year  extends  from  the  fifteenth  of  October  to  the  first  of  July. 
Information  in  regard  to  the  work  of  the  School  and  the  require- 
ments for  admission  can  be  had  on  application  to  Professor  Hawes, 
who  represents  Wellesley  College  upon  the  Managing  Committee 
of  the  School.* 

Scholarships  in  the  Marine  Biological  Laboratory  at 
Wood's  Holl. — Wellesley  College  is  entitled  to  appoint  annu- 
ally two  students  who  may  enjoy  all  the  advantages  of  this 
laboratory  without  expense  for  tuition.  This  laboratory,  which 
is  open  during  the  summer  for  the  study  of  marine  life,  affords 
opportunities  both  to  investigators  and  to  persons  needing 
instruction  or  direction. 

Students  in  either  Botany  or  Zoology  who  desire  to  undertake 
original  work  will  receive  suitable  direction.  In  addition  to  these 
opportunities  there  are  courses  of  lectures  on  special  topics  and  on 
subjects  of  general  biological  interest.  Applications  for  appoint- 
ment should  state  the  character  of  the  work  to  be  done, — i.  e., 
whether  botanical  or  zoological,  whether  general  work,  investiga- 
tion under  direction,  or  independent  investigation, — and  should  be 
forwarded  to  Professor  Ferguson  or  Professor  Willcox  in  time  to 
reach  Wellesley  College  before  April  ist. 

Scholarships  at  the  Zoological  Station  in  Naples. — 
Wellesley  College  is  a  subscriber  to  the  support  of  the  Ameri- 
can Women's  Table  at  the  Zoological  Station  in  Naples,  and 
thus  has  a  voice  in  the  selection  of  the  persons  who  make  use 
of  it.  Such  persons  must  be  capable  of  independent  investi- 
gation in  Botany,  Zoology,  or  Physiology.  Appointments  are 
made  for  a  longer  or  shorter  period,  as  seems  in  each  case 
expedient.  Applications  for  the  use  of  the  table  may  be  made 
through  the  President  of  the  College. 

Thirty  Scholarships  to  the  value  of  ^175  a  year  have 
been  established  for  the  benefit  of  approved  candidates  for  the 
M.A.  degree  in  residence  at  Wellesley.  Applications  for  these 
scholarships  should  be  addressed  to  the  Dean  of  the  College, 
Wellesley  College,   Wellesley,  Mass. 

*A  few  Fellowships  are  awarded  on  competitive  examination. 


1909-10  Scholarships  147 

B.      FOR  UN^DERGRADUATES 

The  income  of  these  scholarships  is  applied  to  the  aid  of  meri- 
torious undergraduate  students  whose  personal  means  are  insuffi- 
cient for  their  maintenance  in  college. 

The  Wood  Memorial  ScHOLARsmpof  ^5,000,  founded  in  1878, 

by  Caroline  A.  Wood,  in  memory  of  her  husband. 
The   Grover  Scholarship  of  ^5,000,  founded  in  1878,  by 

William  O.  Grover. 
The   Weston   Scholarship   of  ^5,000,  founded  in  1878,  by 

David  M.  Weston. 
The  Northfield  Seminary  Scholarship,  founded  in  1878. 
The  Pauline  A.  Durant  Scholarship  of  ^5,000,  founded  in 

1880,  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Durant. 
The  Sweatman  Scholarship  of  ^5,000,  founded  in  1880,  by 

V.  C.  Sweatman. 
The  Walter  Baker  Memorial  Scholarship,  founded  in  1880, 

by  Eleanor  J.  W.  Baker ;  raised  to  ;^7,ooo  by  will  of  Mrs. 

Baker  in  1892. 
The   Annie    M.   Wood    Scholarship,  founded  in  1880,  by 

Frank  Wood. 
Two  Frost  Scholarships,  founded  in  1880,  by  Rufus  S.  Frosty 

as  follows  : — 

One  of  ^1,000,  the  income  to  be  given  annually  to  some 
member  of  the  graduating  class  designated  by  the 
Faculty. 

One  of  ^5,000,  the  income  to  be  devoted  annually  to  the 
aid  of  students. 
The  Union  Church  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1880, 

by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  A.  W.  Stetson. 
The  Florence  N.  Brown  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,000, 

founded  in  1880,  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Samuel  N.  Brown,  Jr. 
The  Augustus  R.  Clark  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $5,000, 

founded  in  1880,  by  Mr.  and  Mrs.  A.  N.  Clark. 
Four   Harriet   Fowle   Scholarships,  founded   in    1881,  by 

Henry  Fowle  Durant  in  memory  of  his  mother. 


148  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

The  Durant  Memorial   Scholarship  of  ^5,000,  founded  in 

1883,  by  the  officers  and  students  of  Wellesley  College,  in 

honor  of  Henry  F.  Durant,  the  income  to  be  appropriated 

annually  to  some  student  selected  by  the  Faculty. 
The  Jane  Topliff  Memorial  Scholarship  of  ^6,000,  founded 

in  1883,  by  Mrs.  William  S.  Houghton,  in  memory  of  her 

mother. 
The  Income  of  a  fund  of  ^25,000,  known  as  the  Stone  Edu- 
cational Fund,  founded  in  1884,  by  Valeria  G.  Stone. 
The  Jeannie  L.  White  Scholarship  of  ^5,000,  founded  in 

1886,  by  herself. 
The  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Solomon  F.  Smith  Memorial  Scholarship, 

founded  in  1888,  by  George  Smith,  for  the  tuition  of 

students  from  the  town  of  Wellesley. 
The  Margaret  McClung  Cowan  Fund,  of  ^1,000,  founded 

in  1888,  by  Rev.  and  Mrs.  P.  D.  Cowan,  in  memory  of 

their  daughter. 
The  Emmelar  Scholarship  of  ;^5,ooo,  founded  in  1889,  by 

the  class  of '91,  the  income  to  be  appropriated  annually 

to  some  student  selected  by  the  Faculty. 
The  Sarah  J.  Houghton  Scholarship  of  ^6,000,  founded  in 

1889,  by  WiUiam  S.  Houghton,  in  memory  of  his  wife. 
The  Provision  of  E.  A.  Goodnow,  in  1885,  through  which 

the  sum  of  ^250  is  annually  divided  among  five  deserving 

students. 
The  Edith  Baker  Memorial  Scholarship  of  ^7,000,  founded 

by  bequest  of  Eleanor  J.  W.  Baker  in  1892. 
The   Joseph    N.   Fiske  Memorial  Scholarship  of    ^8,000, 

founded  in  1892,  by  Mrs.  J.  N.  Fiske. 
The  Abbie   A.   Coburn   Memorial    Scholarship   of   ^2,000, 

founded  in  1892. 
The   Eliza   C.  Jewett  Scholarship  of  $6,000,  founded  in 

1894 ;  the  income  to  be  appropriated  to  the  daughter  of 

a  clergyman,  or  of  a  home  or  foreign  missionary,  selected 

by  the  Faculty  of  the  College. 
The  Ada   L.  Howard   Scholarship   of  $6,000,  founded   in 

1895. 


1909-10  Scholarships  149 

The  Helen  Day  Gould  Scholarship,  founded  in   1896,  by 

Helen  Miller  Gould,  in  memory  of  her  mother ;  raised  to 

;^  1 0,000  by  Miss  Gould  in  1901. 
The  Goodwin  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in   1897,  by 

Hannah  B.  Goodwin. 
The  Hyde  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded  in  1898,  by  Sarah 

B.  Hyde. 
The  Bill  Scholarship  of  $7,000,  founded  in  1898,  by  Charles 

Bill. 
The  Holbrook  Scholarship  of  $3,000,  founded  in  1898,  by 

Sarah  J.  Holbrook. 
The  (second)   Helen  Day  Gould  Scholarship,  founded  in 

1899,  by  Helen  Miller  Gould;  raised  to  $10,000  by  Miss 

Gould  in  1901. 
The  Mary  Elizabeth  Gere  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded 

in  1899,  by  Mary  Elizabeth  Gere. 
The  Ann   Morton  Towle  Memorial  Scholarship  Fund  of 

$5,000,  established  in  1 901,  by  bequest  of  George  Francis 

Towle. 
The  Dana  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in  1901,  through 

the  gift  of  Charles  B.  Dana. 
The  (third)   Helen   Day   Gould   Scholarship  of  $10,000, 

founded  in  1901,  by  Helen  Miller  Gould. 
The  George  Willl^m  Towle  Memorial  Scholarship  Fund, 

founded  in  1 901,  by  bequest  of  George  Francis  Towle. 
The  Anna  Palen  Scholarship  of  $10,000,  founded  in  1902. 
The   Rollins   Scholarship  of  $8,000,  founded  in  1903,  by 

Augusta  and  Hannah   H.  RoUins,  in   memory  of  their 

parents. 
The  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $1,000,  founded  in  1904,  by 

the  class  of  1889,  in  memory  of  classmates  who   have 

died. 
The  Elizabeth  S.  Fiske  Scholarship  of  $5,000,  founded  in 

1904,  by  bequest  of  Miss  Fiske. 
The  Mae  McElwain  Rice  Memorial  Scholarship  of  $1,000, 

founded  in  1905,  by  the  class  of  1902. 


150  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

The  Sanborn  Alumnae  Scholarship,  yielding  $450  annually, 
founded  in  1905,  by  Helen  J.  Sanborn  of  the  class  of 
1884,  for  the  benefit  of  daughters  of  Alumnae. 

The  Julia  Ball  Thayer  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded  in 
1907,  by  bequest  of  Mrs.  Julia  B.  Thayer,  of  Keene,  N.  H. 

The  Adams  Scholarship  of  ^2,000,  founded  in  1907,  by  be- 
quest of  Adoniram  J.  Adams,  of  Boston. 

The  Ransom  Scholarship  of  ^1,000,  founded  in  1908,  by 
bequest  of  Catherine  Ayer  Ransom. 

The  Emily  T.  Hidden  Scholarship  of  $2,000,  founded  in 
1909,  by  bequest  of  Mary  E.  Hidden. 

Another  source  of  pecu|iiary  aid  is  in  the  work  of  the  Stu- 
dents' Aid  Society.  Small  amounts  are  loaned  to  students 
without  interest,  in  the  expectation  that  whenever  they  are 
able,  these  students  will  repay  the  Society.  Assistance  is  often 
given  partly  in  gifts  and  partly  in  loans.  The  funds  at  the  dis- 
posal of  the  Society  are  wholly  insufficient  to  meet  the  wants 
of  deserving  applicants.  Contributions  of  any  amount  will  be 
gladly  received,  and  should  be  sent  to  the  Treasurer  of  the 
Society,  Mrs.  PauHne  A.  Durant,  Wellesley,  Mass. 

All  applications  for  assistance  should  be  made  by  letter 
addressed  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Students'  Aid  Society, 
Wellesley,  Mass.,  before  the  first  of  May  preceding  the 
college  year  for  which  the  aid  is  needed.  It  should  be  noted 
that  owing  to  inadequacy  of  funds,  aid  cannot  be  promised  in 
advance  to  students  who  have  not  entered. 

The  Wellesley  College  Loan  Fund,  estabhshed  in  1908 
through  the  gift  of  alumnae  and  other  friends  of  the  College, 
and  the  McDonald-Ellis  Loan  Fund  of  $500  established  in 
1908  by  former  students  of  the  McDonald-Ellis  School,  of 
Washington,  D.  C,  in  memory  of  the  late  principals  of  the 
school,  are  valuable  aids  in  this  work  for  students. 

In  two  cottages  a  reduction  is  allowed  on  payment  for 
board,  under  certain  conditions. 


1909-10  Equipment  151 

I.IBRARY 

The  Library  of  the  College,  endowed  by  Eben  Norton 
Horsford,  now  numbers  65,639  volumes,  including  the 
departmental  and  special  libraries  enumerated  below.  The 
General  Library  is  open  on  week  days  from  8  a.  m.  to  9.30 
p.  M.,  and  on  Sundays  from  2  to  6  p.  m.  Students  have  direct 
access  to  the  shelves.  The  library  is  catalogued  by  author 
and  subject  entries,  and  the  most  recent  and  useful  biblio- 
graphical aids  are  provided ;  special  effort  is  made  by  the 
librarians  to  train  students  in  methods  of  research. 

The  Library  subscribes  for  six  daily  and  three  weekly  papers 
and  for  one  hundred  and  seventy-two  American  and  foreign 
periodicals.  The  list  includes  the  most  important  representa- 
tives of  the  branches  of  instruction  comprised  in  the  college 
curriculum. 

The  Gertrude  Memorial  Library,  established  by  Mr.  A.  A. 
Sweet,  the  Missionary  Library,  and  other  collections  in  the 
General  Library,  furnish  4,969  volumes  for  Bibhcal  study  and 
religious  reading. 

The  Library  of  American  Linguistics,  a  special  gift  from 
Mr.  Horsford,  numbering:  1,420  works,  comprises  the  valuable 
collections  of  Major  J.  W.  Powell  and  Mr.  Horsford  relating  to 
North  American  Indian  languages. 

The  Plimpton  Library,  established  by  Mr.  George  A. 
Plimpton  in  memory  of  his  wife,  Frances  Pearsons  PHmpton, 
of  the  class  of  1884,  comprises  841  volumes  of  early  Italian 
literature,  including  both  manuscripts  and  printed  books  of 
the  fifteenth  century. 

The  Music  Library,  in  Billings  Hall,  includes  a  collection 
of  manuscripts  and  musical  scores,  besides  books  on  music. 

The  following  collections  are  placed  in  the  laboratories  of 
the  respective  departments  : — 

Art  Library,  2,200  volumes. 

Library  of  Botany,  2,409  volumes. 

Library  of  Physics  and  Astronomy,  2,793  volumes. 

Library  of  Zoology  and  Physiology,  2,225  volumes. 

Library  of  Chemistry,  1,397  volumes. 


152  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

HYGIENE     AND    PHYSICAL    EDUCATION 

The  department  occupies  the  new  Mary  Hemenway  Hall 
on  the  western  border  of  the  college  grounds.  It  is  designed 
to  meet  the  requirements  of  the  course  for  the  training  of 
teachers  of  hygiene  and  physical  education,  and  to  provide 
gymnasium  practice  for  the  entire  College.  The  equipment 
includes  a  large,  well-lighted  gymnasium  with  ample  bathing 
facilities,  administrative  offices,  class  rooms,  and  laboratories 
for  anatomy,  physiology,  hygiene,  anthropometry,  corrective 
gymnastics,  and  research.  Immediately  adjoining  Mary 
Hemenway  Hall  are  tennis  courts,  basket  ball  and  hockey 
fields,  with  room  for  further  expansion.  Lake  Waban  furnishes 
facilities  for  rowing  and  skating,  and  there  is  also  a  golf 
course  with  a  clubhouse.  The  equipment  of  the  department  is 
designed  solely  to  aid  in  the  application  of  modern  principles 
of  science  to  the  maintenance  and  promotion  of  health. 


THE   FARNSWORTH  ART   BUILDING 
AND   ART   COLLECTIONS 

The  Farnsworth  Art  Building,  the  gift  of  the  late  Isaac  D. 
Farnsworth,  was  opened  in  September,  1889.  Besides  lecture 
rooms,  galleries  for  collections,  and  studios  for  those  engaged 
in  drawing  and  painting,  a  special  feature  is  the  arrangement  of 
laboratories  and  libraries,  so  that  the  books  and  art  material 
relating  to  particular  subjects  and  periods  can  be  made  imme- 
diately available  to  general  students. 

The  Art  Collection  consists  of  a  large  number  of  photo- 
graphs and  other  material,  including  among  others  original 
pieces  of  antique  sculpture  from  the  Day  Kimball  Fund ;  the 
James  Jackson  Jarves  collection  of  laces  and  vestments ;  a 
collection  of  Indian  baskets,  the  gift  of  Mrs.  Rufus  S.  Frost, 
and  the  Stetson  collection  of  modern  paintings.  Two  exam- 
ples of  early  Italian  painting  have  recently  been  acquired. 

The  collection  of  photographs  and  other  reproductions 
numbers  over  nine  thousand  seven  hundred. 


1909-10  Equipment  153 

EQUIPMENT  IN  MUSIC 

Music  Hall  and  Billings  Hall  are  large  brick  buildings 
devoted  entirely  to  the  department  of  Music.  Music  Hall  has 
an  adequate  equipment  of  instruments  for  students'  use,  a 
room  for  choral  practice,  and  practice  rooms  of  good  size. 
Organ  instruction  is  given  not  only  on  the  older  type  of  organ, 
but  also  on  two  large,  three-manual  electric  organs  embodying 
the  latest  principles  of  organ  construction.  Constant  refer- 
ence will  be  made  to  the  use  of  the  organ  in  church. 

Billings  Hall,  built  in  1904,  contains  the  offices  of  the 
department  of  Music,  the  library  and  class  rooms  for  instruc- 
tion in  Musical  Theory;  also  a  concert  room  seating  four 
hundred  and  twenty-five  people,  and  containing  the  Grover 
organ,  a  large,  three- manual  organ,  rebuilt  and  modernized. 

I.ABORATORIES   AND    SCIENTIFIC 
COLLECTIONS 

ASTRONOMY 

The  Whitin  Observatory  is  supplied  with  a  twelve-inch 
refracting  telescope  with  micrometer,  spectroscope,  and  pho- 
tometer attachments ;  a  six-inch  telescope,  also  with  driving 
clock  and  micrometer;  two  transits,  the  larger  a  three-inch 
prismatic  transit ;  two  chronographs,  two  sidereal  clocks  and  a 
Bond  chronometer;  a  concave  grating  spectroscope,  and  a 
collection  of  minor  instruments  and  photographs. 

Meteorological  instruments,  including  thermometer  shelter, 
thermograph,  barograph,  anemometer,  and  anemoscope,  are 
installed  at  the  observatory. 

BOTANY 

The  department  of  Botany  has  the  use  of  six  new  labora- 
tories well  supplied  with  microscopes,  electric  stereopti- 
con,  and  other  modern  apparatus  and  appliances.  Apparatus 
for  advanced  work  includes  an  autoclave,  a  paraffin  oven,  and 
revolving,  sliding,  and  freezing  microtomes. 


154  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

The  illustrative  collections  comprise  an  herbarium  of  nearly 
eight  thousand  phanerogams  and  seven  thousand  cryptogams 
recently  increased  by  the  lichen  collection  of  the  late  Prof. 
Clara  E.  Cummings ;  also  a  collection  of  woods,  fruits,  and 
economic  vegetable  products  ;  two  hundred  charts  by  Hens- 
low,  Kny,  Dodel,  Tschirch,  and  others  ;  a  collection  of  Auzoux's 
botanical  models ;  Brendel's  glass  models  of  cryptogams ; 
lantern  sHdes  and  microscope  mounts.  A  gift  of  seventeen 
hundred  water  color  paintings  of  North  American  plants  by 
the  late  Helen  Frances  Ayres  has  lately  been  received.  In 
addition  collections  for  a  permanent  museum  now  number 
more  than  five  thousand  specimens. 

Classes  have  the  use  of  a  garden  and  plots  of  wild  ground 
as  well.  Specimens  are  also  supplied  from  a  private  green- 
house. The  native  flora  about  Wellesley  is  rich  and  easily 
accessible,  furnishing  a  convenient  field  for  both  the  taxono- 
mist  and  ecologist.  A  small  glass  house  is  an  aid  to  work  in 
landscape  gardening  and  in  plant  physiology.  The  library  is 
well  supplied  with  reference  works  and  with  current  periodicals. 

CHEMISTRY 

The  department  of  Chemistry  occupies  a  separate  building, 
which  contains  two  lecture  rooms  and  the  chemical  library,  in 
addition  to  the  rooms  fitted  up  for  laboratory  work.  Separate 
rooms  are  provided  for  work  in  General  and  Organic  Chem- 
istry, QuaUtative  and  Quantitative  Analysis,  Air  and  Water 
Analysis  and  Food  Analysis.  The  building  is  conveniently 
arranged  and  well  equipped  with  necessary  apparatus  and 
appliances. 

GEOI.OGY  AND   GEOGRAPHY 

The  geological  collection  of  cabinet  specimens  is  arranged 
to  illustrate  the  subjects  of  historical  and  structural  geology, 
petrography  and  mineralogy.  There  are  three  collections  well 
equipped  for  class-room  use, — one  each  in  mineralogy,  petrog- 
raphy,  and    palaeontology.      They   consist   of  well   selected 


1909-10  Equipment  155 

specimens  systematically  arranged  in  sets  of  trays.  During  a 
class  appointment  in  these  subjects,  each  student  has  a  tray 
which  presents  objectively  the  subject  of  the  lesson. 

The  laboratory  containing  these  collections  is  supplied  with 
tables  equipped  with  appliances  for  blow-pipe  analysis  and 
other  laboratory  work. 

For  geography  the  department  has  five  thousand  Topo- 
graphic maps  of  the  United  States  Geologic  Survey.  Three 
thousand  of  these  are  arranged  by  groups  to  illustrate  geo- 
graphic types. 

The  department  has  a  valuable  collection  of  fourteen  hun- 
dred lantern  sUdes,  which  illustrate  all  phases  of  geology  and 
geography. 

MATHEMATICS 

The  collection  of  mathematical  models  consists  of  a  set  of 
models  of  simple  solids,  surfaces  of  the  second  and  higher 
orders,  and  circular  sections  of  surfaces  of  the  second  order. 
They  are  executed  in  wood,  thread,  card,  and  plaster. 

PHYSICS 

The  department  of  Physics  occupies  a  convenient  lecture 
room,  provided  with  arrangements  for  sunlight  and  lantern 
projection  and  adequate  apparatus  for  illustrative  experiments. 

Laboratories  for  students  are  equipped  with  instruments 
adapted  to  a  wide  range  of  work.  Rooms  are  especially  fitted 
for  photometry,  photography,  spectroscopic  work,  and  elec- 
trical measurements.  A  workshop  is  provided  with  lathe  and 
tools.  Storage  batteries  and  dynamos  are  connected  with  the 
laboratories. 

PSYCHOI^OGY 

The  work  of  the  laboratory  is  carried  on  in  seven  rooms 
(including  a  dark-room)  with  electrical  connections.  The 
equipment  includes  electric-motor  color  mixers,  a  campimeter, 
a  Wheatstone  stereoscope,  the  Hering  simultaneous  contrast 


156  Wellesley  College  1909-10 

apparatus,  sonometers,  Konig  tuning-forks,  Quincke's  tubes, 
Galton's  piston  whistle,  Zwaardemaker's  clinical  and  fluid- 
mantle  olfactometers,  with  a  large  collection  of  smell  material, 
sesthesiometers,  a  pressure  balance,  the  apparatus  of  Munster- 
berg  and  of  Titchener  for  the  locahzation  of  sound,  Jastrow's 
memory  apparatus,  the  Spindel  and  Hoyer  apparatus  for  mem- 
ory experiments,  a  Hipp  chronoscope  with  the  Ebbinghaus 
control  apparatus,  vernier  chronoscopes,  a  pneumograph,  a 
plethysmograph,  sphygmographs  of  different  forms,  a  finger- 
dynamometer,  an  automatograph,  tambours,  kymographs,  elec- 
tric motors,  an  electric  tuning-fork,  Lough's  electrically  actuated 
pendulum,  Malzel's  mercury  contact  metronome,  etc.,  besides 
apparatus  for  special  investigations.  Students  have  the  use  of 
models  of  the  brain,  eye,  and  ear. 

ZOOLOGY 

There  are  four  laboratories  for  the  study  of  Zoology  and 
Animal  Physiology.  Each  is  adequately  equipped  for  its 
special  purpose.  A  complete  set  of  physiological  apparatus 
from  the  Harvard  Apparatus  Company  is  provided  for  each 
student  in  the  physiology  course. 

The  Zoology  Museum  contains  a  typical  collection  of  both 
vertebrates  and  invertebrates,  and  a  considerable  number  of 
models  by  Ziegler,  Blaschka,  Auzoux,  and  Deyrolle.  There 
are  also  excellent  collections  of  birds  and  of  insects,  and  a 
small  one  of  fishes  prepared  by  Denton. 


NEEDS   OF   THE   COLEEGE 

Wellesley  College,  established  by  private  benevolence,  en- 
tered upon  its  work  with  a  costly  nfjaterial  equipment,  but  with 
no  endowment  in  money. 

The  endowment  of  the  library  by  Mr.  E.  N.  Horsford,  the 
later  contributions  of  Mr.  Rockefeller  and  others  to  general  and 
special  endowment,  have  greatly  relieved  the  burden  resting 
upon  the  College.  Yet  to-day  the  receipts  from  board  and 
tuition  fees  form  the  main  resource  with  which  to  meet  running 
expenses  and  annual  repairs,  and  to  make  those  additions  to 
apparatus  and  buildings  which  are  demanded  by  the  constant 
advance  and  expansion  of  college  instruction  throughout  the 
country. 

It  must  be  evident  that  the  past  outlay  has  been  amply 
justified  by  results.  Notwithstanding  the  peculiar  dependence 
of  the  College  upon  the  number  of  students  admitted  and 
retained,  its  whole  existence  has  been  attended  by  a  constant 
rise  in  the  academic  standard.  From  Wellesley  have  been 
graduated  over  thirty-five  hundred  young  women,  who  have 
carried  the  fruits  of  their  college  training  into  the  schools  and 
households  of  their  country,  and  into  benevolent  work  at  home 
and  abroad.  It  is  believed  that  the  College  can  with  full  con- 
fidence appeal  to  the  public  at  large  for  further  aid. 

Among  the  urgent  needs  of  the  College  are  the  following  : — 

1 .  Unrestricted  funds  for  defraying  general  expenses. 

2.  The  endowment  of  professorships. 

3.  A  science  building. 

4.  Halls  of  residence. 

5.  An  endowment  for  infirmary. 

6.  Fellowships  for  graduate  study. 


FORMS  OF  BEQUEST 


/  give   and  bequeath    to    Wellesley    College,  a    corporation 
established  by  law,  in  the  town  of  Wellesley,  county  of  Norfolk, 

and  Commonwealth  of  Massachusetts,  the  sum  of 

dollars,  to  be  safely  invested  by  it,  and  called  the Endow- 
ment Fund.  The  interest  shall  be  applied  to  the  payment  of 
the  salaries  of  teachers  in  Wellesley  College,  as  the  Trustees 
shall  deem  expedient. 


I  give  and  bequeath    to    Wellesley    College,    a    corporation 
established  by  law,  in  the  town  of  Wellesley,  county  of  Norfolk, 

and  Com7nonwealth  of  Massachusetts,  the  suin  of 

dollars,  to  be  appropriated  by  the  Trustees  for  the  benefit  of  the 
College  in  such  manner  as  they  shall  thi?ik  will  be  most  useful. 


I  give   and  bequeath    to    Wellesley    College,  a    corporation 
established  by  law,  in  the  town  of  Wellesley,  county  of  Norfolk, 

and  Commonwealth  of  Massachusetts,  the  sum  of 

dollars,  to  be  safely  invested  by  it,  and  called  the Scholai'- 

ship  Fund.     The  interest  of  this  fu?td  shall  be  applied  to  aid 
deserving  students  in  Wellesley  College. 


DEGREES   CONFERRED   IN    1909 
3IASTER  OF   ARTS 

Ruth   Dane   Eddy   (B.A.    Pomona    College,    1906),    English    Literature  and 
Language. 
Thesis:     Edward    Phillips     Theatrum    Poetarum    {Anglicanorum) .      A 
Critical  Edition. 
Florence  Emily  Hastings  (B.A.,  Wellesley  College,  \'==o,i) ,  Teutonic  Philology. 

Flora  Isabel  MacKinnon  (B.A.,  Wellesley,  igo-^).  Philosophy  and  Psychology. 

Thesis:    The  Philosophy  of  John  Norris  of  Bremerton. 
Ruth  Frances  Woodsmall  (B.A.,   University  of  Nebraska,   1905),    German 
Language  and  Literature. 

BACHELOR  OF  ARTS 


Elizabeth  Ingram  Adamson. 
Anna  Mary  Albertson. 
Evelyn  Hope  Aldrich. 
Marion  Goodwin  Alexander. 
Helen  Allen. 
Lillian  Botume  Alley. 
Ethel  Elma  Ambler. 
WiLLYE  Anderson. 
Susanna  Edwards  Annin. 
Alice  Rebecca  Apfenzeller. 
Alene  Hubbard  Arnold. 
Marguerite  Evangeline 

Bacheller. 
Florence  Levina  Baldwin. 
Lucretia  Beatrice  Ball. 
Margaret  Madelaine  Barlow. 
Margaret  Lincoln  Barry. 
Hope  Angell  Bates. 
Esther  Bean. 

Helen  Shakespeare  Beddall. 
Sybil  Samuel  Berry. 
Edna  Banks  Blood. 
Ethel  May  Bosworth. 
Grace  Marjorik  Bowden. 
Alice  Damon  Bowers. 
Isabel  Bradshaw. 
Elsie  Farson  Bradt. 
Hattie  Payson  Brazier. 
Flora  Belle  Brigham. 
Florence  May  Brigham. 
Amy  Marguerite  Brown. 
Anna  Brown. 
Edith  Winifred  Bryant. 
Beulah  Imogene  Buckley. 


Emma  Louise  Bucknam. 
Arline  March  Burdick. 
Helena  Louisa  Butterbach. 
Josephine  Dayton  Butterfield. 
Martha  Bennett  Cecil. 
Anna  Curtis  Chandler. 
Elsa  Chapin. 
Josephine  Tanner  Chase. 
Sidney  Agnes  Clapp 
Fanny  Green  Clark. 
Marjorie  May  Clark. 
AiMEE  Juliet  Conant. 
Elizabeth  Merrill  Conant. 
Delia  Chase  Conger. 
Leslie  Conner. 
Rhoda  Cotton  Coombs. 
Virginia  Lambert  Coulston. 
Eleanor  Louise  Cox. 
Emma  Boxley  Cox. 
Jean  Adelaide  Cross. 
Kathleen  Eliza  Cutting. 
Ethel  Moseley  Damon. 
Rebekah  Finley  Davidson, 
Alice  Mabel  Decker. 
Christine  Anderson  Dickey. 
Lillian  Ditmars. 
Mabel  Dodd. 
Florence  Helen  Doe. 
Elizabeth  Dougherty. 
Martha  Louisa  Drake. 
Edith  Dudley. 
Harriett  Annis  Dunn. 
Avis  Chippewa  Eaton. 
Lorraine  Marshall  Eaton 


160 


Wellesi.ey  College 


1909-10 


Jessie  Yeakel  Edsall. 
Margaret  Orr  Edson. 
Laura  Virginia  Edwarbs. 
Una  Elliott. 
Edna  Cornelia  Ely. 
Madeline  Russell  Erskine. 
Bessie  May  Eskey. 
Mabel  Susan  Farnham. 
Blanche  Fishback. 
Gertrude  Guild  Fisher. 
Georgiana  Keith  Fiske. 
Martha  Redmond  Fleming. 
Edith  Frances  Folsom. 
Eva  Lucy  Foster. 
Mary  Havilah  Foster 
Maude  Bausman  Frantz. 
Juliette  May  Eraser. 
Alice  Gager. 

Wilhelmina  Caroline  Gibbons 
Winifred  Goldring. 
Helen  Goller. 
Mary  Ann  Greenwood. 
Clara  Belle  Gregg. 
Adelaide  Haley. 
Eleanor  Hall. 
Helen  Elizabeth  Hall. 
Katharine  Stanley  Hall. 
Mildred  Clifton  Hall. 
Frances  Halley. 
Ruth  Crosby  Hanford. 
Helen  Raymond  Hart. 
Louise  Kennard  Hayes. 
Hortense  Heath. 
Irvina  Hosmer  Hersey. 
Gertrude  Hicks. 
Marion  Louise  Higgins. 
Frances  Raymond  Hill. 
Dorothy  Hinds. 
Elizabeth  Dennis  Hoffman. 
Alice  Cary  Holmes. 
DoRRis  SouLE  Hough. 
Josephine  Holt  Howes. 
Angie  Clara  Hughes. 
Margaret  Howard  Hull. 
Edith  Frances  Hursh. 
Helen  Mar  Hussey. 
Mary  Fithian  Hutchcraft. 
Margaret  Moffat  Ingram. 
Alice  Maxfield  Jacobs. 
Genevieve  Jacoby. 
Mabel  Irene  Jenkins. 
Laura  Evelyn  Jones. 


Margaret  Victoria  Jones. 
Jeannette  Keim. 
Margaret  Buyers  Kennedy. 
Ruth  Marion  Kenyon. 
Bessie  Gates  Kidder. 
Jennie  Julia  Killars. 
Sallie  Albina  King. 
Caroline  Klingensmith. 
Helen  Burton  Knapp. 
Florence  Leh  Koch. 
Mary  Smith  Larrabee. 
Frances  Mitchell  Lee. 
Helen  Legate. 
Fanny  Sophronia  Lewin. 
Mary  Lewis. 
Catherine  Augusta  List. 
Eleanor  Nightingale  Little. 
Julia  Garland  Locke. 
Helen  Long. 
Helen  Popple  Lunt. 
Olive  Moore  Lupton. 
Charlotte  Dana  Lyman. 
Grace  Florence  Lynde. 
Gladys  Rae  MacArthur 
OLive  Clinton  McCabe. 
Agnes  Esther  McCarthy. 
Elcy  Theodosia  McCausey. 
Mary  Louise  McCausey. 
Ethel  Roberta  McCombs. 
Edith  May  McCurdy. 
Anna  Hunter  Macfarlane. 
Margery  Emily  MacFarlane. 
Mary  Ambler  McNab. 
Dorothea  Lawrance  Mann. 
Gertrude  Emily  Mann. 
Marion  Emsley  Markley. 
Dorothea  March  Marston. 
Laura  Maxwell. 
Mary  Florence  Mecredy. 
Edith  Eastwood  Metcalf. 
Dorothy  Culver  INIills. 
Edith  Forrest  Mills. 
Frances  Mitchell. 
Priscilla  Mitchell. 
Alberta  Elizabeth  Moore. 
Betty  Taylor  More. 
Cora  Susan  Morison. 
Lillian  Regina  Morris. 
Amy  Norman  Morse. 
Sophia  Moses. 
Ruth  Sackett  Muir. 
Alice  Heulings  Mumper. 


1909-10 


Degrees  Conferred 


161 


Mildred  Phillips  Neal. 
Anna  Martin  Newton. 
Helene  Whiting  Batchelder 

Nichols. 
Rhoda  Lombard  Nickerson. 
Katharine  Norcross. 
Mary  Theodora  Noss. 
Helen  Mae  O'Leary. 
Florence  Armitage  Olney. 
Edith  Elvira  Osgood. 
Minnie  Packard. 
Helen  Brodrick  Palmer. 
Paula  Pardee. 
Ethelyn  May  Pattee. 
Mary  Elizabeth  Patterson. 
Lena  Isabella  Paul. 
Edith  Payne. 
Ruth  Isabel  Pead. 
Julia  Spear  Pease. 
Hester  Perry. 
Katharine  Avery  Perry. 
Olive  Tenie  Peterson. 
Aph  Pryor  Phelps. 
Sara  Blair  Pinkham, 
Ruth  Fletcher  Pinney. 
Madeleine  Piper. 
Adele  Preble. 
Marion  Evelyn  Pulsifer. 
Elizabeth  Augusta  Quimby. 
Bertha  Susan  Rankin. 
Eleanor  Agnes  Raymond. 
Ruth  Reeder. 
Alice  Rice  Reynolds. 
Alma  Pauline  Richter. 
Isabel  Graham  Ridgway. 
Kate  Parrish  Roach. 
Nelson  Egleston  Robertson. 
Margaret  Wilcox  Robinson. 
Mildred  Arline  Robinson. 
Inez  Atwood  Rogers. 
Agnes  Edwards  Rothery. 
Mary  Ballou  Sanderson. 
Marion  Dutton  Savage. 
Adah  Clenny  Sawyer. 
Mary  Schermerhorn. 
Clara  Henrietta  Eleonore 

Heidenreich  Schwartz 
Linnie  Gertrude  Searles. 
Ruth  Sener. 
Theresa  Severin. 
Margaret  Elizabeth  Shepard. 
Annie  Shuck. 


Ellen  McKeighan  Silliman. 

Mary  McClelland  Sinex,  2D. 

Helen  Louise  Slack. 

Charlotte  Temperance  Smith. 

Emma  Louise  Smith. 

Georgia  Roberta  Smith. 

Dora  May  Soule. 

Marie  Doering  Spaiir 

Syrena  Harriet  Stackpole. 

Beatrice  Maud  Stevens. 

Florence  Etta  Stevens. 

Mary  Lois  Stone. 

Marion  Folsom  Stratton. 

Caroline  Priscilla  Stretton. 

Ruth  Fairbanks  Stutson. 

Margaret  Elizabeth  Suydam. 

Agnes  Swain. 

Emily  Taber. 

Frances  Louise  Taft. 

Mabel  Adelia  Taylor. 

Stella  Arnold  Taylor. 

Mary  Halsted  Terry. 

Maria  Louise  Thiery. 

Mary  Brewster  Thompson. 

B'lorence  Irene  Tucker. 

Mary  Morrow  Tucker. 

Frances  Washington  Tufts. 

Jennie  VanEtten. 

Elizabeth  Patten  Vose. 

Caroline  Wakefield. 

Mary  Ball  Walker. 

Ruby  Elizabeth  Walker. 

Florence  Irene  Watt. 

Muriel  Mary  W^att. 

Ella  Genevieve  Webster. 

Marion  Aldrich  Webster. 

Edith  Yates  Whitney. 

Margaret  Whitney. 

Leala  Medwin  Wilcox. 

Dorothy  Williams. 

Ruby  Willis. 

Lucy  Wilson. 

Mabel  Ray  Wilson. 

Ruth  Ellen  Wilson. 

Susan  Story  Wonson. 

Edna  Marion  Wood. 

Mary  Elizabeth  Wood. 

Maud  Alice  Woodward. 

Elsie  Lemyra  Wright. 

Mary  Zabriskie. 

Fridoline  Bertha  Zimmermann. 


HONOR    SCHOLrARSHIPS 

Honor  Scholarships  (without  stipend)  have  been  established 
by  the  College  for  the  purpose  of  giving  recognition  to  a  high 
degree  of  excellence  in  academic  work.  These  honors  fall 
into  two  classes:  students  in  the  first,  or  higher  class,  are 
termed  Durant  Scholars;  students  in  the  second  class  are 
termed  Wellesley  College  Scholars. 

These  honors  are  awarded  to  seniors  on  the  basis  of  two 
and  one-half  years'  work,  to  juniors  on  the  basis  of  one  and 
one-half  years'  work.  The  standard  in  each  case  is  absolute, 
not  competitive. 

DURANT   SCHOtiARS 

APPOINTED   IN    1909 


Marion  Goodwin  Alexander,  '09. 
Beulah  Irene  Bowen,  '10. 
Elsie  Farson  Bradt,  '09. 
Helen  Bulkley,  '10. 
Helen  Burr,  '10. 
Martha  Bennett  Cecil,  'og. 
Dorothy  Dey,  'id. 
ISADORE  Douglas,  '10. 
Winifred  Goldring,  '09. 
Ruth  Crosby  Hanford,  '09. 
Dorothy  Maude  Hazeltine,  '10. 
Irene  Heiser,  '10. 
DoRRis  SouLE  Hough,  '09. 
Eva  Estelle  Jeffs,  '10. 


Jeannette  Keim,  '09. 

Lois  McKinney,  '10. 

Marion  Emsley  Markley,  '09. 

Dorothea  March  Marston,  '09. 

Sophia  Moses,  '09. 

Ruth  Sackett  Muir,  '09. 

Eleanor  Robb  Patterson,  '10. 

Margaret  Wilcox  Robinson,  '09. 

Mary  Lois  Stone,  '09. 

Frances  Washington  Tufts,  '09. 

Emilie  Merry  Ward,  '10. 

Dorothy  Williams,  '09. 

Ruby  Willis,  '09 

Elsie  Lemyra  Wright,  '09. 


WEIjliESIiEY  COL-IiEGE   SCHOLARS 

APPOINTED   IN    1909 


Rosalind  Kahn  Ach,  '10. 
Ethel  Leona  Andem,  '10. 
Dora  Cornelia  Anderson,  '10. 
Susanna  Edwards  Annin,  '09. 
Harriet  Rose  Blodgett,  '10. 
Irma  Rose  Bonning,  '10. 
Hattie  Payson  Brazier,  '09. 
Sidney  Agnes  Clapp,  '09. 
Leslie  Conner,  '09. 
Lucy  Elinor  Cook,  '10. 
Florence  Mildred  Craft,  '09. 
Ethel  Moseley  Damon,  '09. 
Lorraine  Marshall  Eaton,  '09. 
Laura  Virginia  Edwards,  '09. 
Ruth  Elliott,  '10. 
Mildred  Nutter  Frost,  '10. 
Jane  Faulkner  Goodloe,  '10. 
Georgette  Angie  Grenier,  '10. 
Mayde  Burleson  Hatch,  '10. 
Louise  Kennard  Hayes,  '09. 
Eleanor  Temple  Horne,  '10. 
Helen  Hunting,  '10. 
Katherine  Lavinia  Johnson,  '10. 


Grace  Allerton  Kilbourne,  '10. 
Mary  Louise  McCausey,  '09. 
Marion  Wilson  McKinley,  'id. 
Mary  Ambler  McNab,  '09. 
Dorothy  Culver  Mills,  '09. 
Minnie  Scott  Muirhead,  '10. 
Merridith  Elizabeth  Riddle, '10. 
Ruth  Sapinsky,  '10. 
Marion  Dutton  Savage,  '09. 
Gertrude  Schermerhorn,  'id. 
Marie  Doering  Spahr,  '09. 
Edith  Sweetser,  '10. 
Frances  Louise  Taft,  '09. 
Edith  Eleanor  Taussig,  '10. 
Mabel  Adelia  Taylor,  '09. 
Clara  Burke  Thomas,  'id. 
Mary  Rita  Wahl,  '10. 
Helen  Allston  ^VALLIS,  '10. 
Helene  Boyce  Williams,  '10. 
Marguerite   Florence  Williams, 

'10. 
Florence  Sophia  Wiss,  '10. 
Eleanor  May  Young,  '10. 


SUMMARY  OP  STUDENTS 


Resident  candidates  for  the  M.A.  degree     . 

Candidates  for  the  B.A.  degree  :— 

Seniors 249 

Juniors       .........  289 

Sophomores 323 

Freshmen 349 


on-candidates  for  degrees 

. 

78 

Total  registration,  November,  i 

909         ... 

1319 

nited  States  : — 

Nevada 

I 

Alabama 

I 

New  Hampshire    . 

32 

Arizona 

I 

New  Jersey    . 

92 

Arkansas 

2 

New  York      . 

176 

California 

17 

North  Carolina     . 

7 

Colorado 

15 

North  Dakota 

I 

Connecticut  . 

56 

Ohio      . 

52 

Delaware 

I 

Oregon 

3 

District  of  Columbia 

7 

Pennsylvania 

125 

Florida 

3 

Rhode  Island 

20 

Georgia 

3 

South  Dakota 

3 

Hawaii  . 

3 

Tennessee 

6 

Illinois  . 

56 

Texas     . 

S 

Indiana 

II 

Utah      . 

3 

Iowa 

17 

Virginia 

3 

Kansas 

7 

Vermont 

II 

Kentucky 

18 

Washington 

13 

Maine    . 

43 

West  Virginia 

I 

Maryland 

5 

Wisconsin     . 

10 

Massachusetts 

•       392 

Wyoming 

I 

Michigan 

22 

Brazil 

I 

Minnesota     . 

23 

Canada 

4 

Mississippi    . 

I 

China 

3 

Missouri 

22 

Persia 

I 

Montana 

5 

Russia 

I 

Nebraska 

12 

Spain 

I 

OFFICERS   OF  THE   ALrUMN^ 
ASSOCIATION 


Miss  Ruth  S.  Goodwin,  President^  2,9^6  Chestnut  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Dr.  Ruth  \V.  Lathrop,  Vice  President,  1415  North  17th  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
Miss  Jennie  R.  Beale,  Rec.  Secretary,  S15  Corinthian  Ave.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
Miss  Linda  S.  Hires,  Cor.  Secretary,  Haverford,  Pa. 

Miss  Anna  Palen,  Treasurer,  127  Harvey  St.,  Germantown,  Pa. 

Mrs.  Mary  G.  Ahlers,  AluttmcB  General  Secretary,  Wellesley  College. 

LOCALr  ASSOCIATIONS 

Boston  Wellesley  College  Club, 

Miss  Alice  W.  Stockwell,  Secretary,  23  Orkney  Road,  Brooklihe,  Mass. 
Buffalo  Wellesley  Club  (not  fully  organized). 

Address  Miss  Elsa  D.James,  1105  Delaware  Ave.,  Buffalo,  N.  Y. 
Chicago  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Ruth  Carpenter,  Secretary,  1314  Hinman  Ave.,  Evanston,  111. 
Cleveland  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Bessie  C.  Champney,  Secretary,  2190  East  40th  St.,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 
Colorado  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Helen  Harrington,  Secretary,  1463  South  University  St.,  Denver,  Col. 
Detroit  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Catharine  H.  Dwight,  Secretary,  7S1  Jefferson  Ave.,  Detroit,  Mich. 
FiTCHBURG  Wellesley  College  Club, 

Miss  Harriet  M.  Silsby,  Secretary,  Hastings  Hall,  Fitchburg,  Mass. 
Hartford  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Florence  G.  Bryant,  Secretary,  953  Main  St.,  East  Hartford,  Conn. 
Minneapolis  Wellesley  Club, 

Mrs.  Cyrus  Barnuni,  Secretary,  2103  James  Ave.  South,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 
New  York  Wellesley*  Club, 

Miss  Emma  L.  MacAlarney,  Secretary,  500  West  121st  St.,  New  York  City. 
Northfield  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Leslie  Conner,  Secretary,  East  Northfield,  Mass. 
Pittsburg  Wellesley  Club  (not  fully  organized). 

Address  Mrs.  Henry  D.  James,  5806  Howe  St.,  Pittsburg,  Pa. 
Portland  Wellesley  Club  (not  fully  organized). 

Address  Mrs.  Philip  F.  Chapman,  235  State  St.,  Portland,  Me. 
Rochester  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Jennie  Mae  Clark,  41  Vick  Park  B,  Rochester,  N.  Y, 
Rhode  Island  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Helen  T.  Hartwell,  Secretary,  77  Parade  St.,  Providence,  R.  I. 
Southern  California  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Alice  E.  Heber,  Secretary,  270S  West  9th  St.,  Los  Angeles,  Cal. 
Springfield  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  M.Josephine  C.  Bowden,  Secretary,  193  Wilbraham  Road,  Springfield, 
Mass. 
St.  Louis  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Louis  McNair,  Secretary,  4296  Washington  Boulevard,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 
Washington  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Katharine  R.  Elliott,  Secretary,  3703  14th  St.,  Washington,  D.  C. 
Wellesley  Club  of  Philadelphia, 

Miss  Margaret  E.  Dungan,  Secretary,  3232  N.  i6th  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
Wellesley  Club  of  San  Francisco, 

Miss  Mabel  L.  Pierce,  Secretary  1000  Chestnut  St.,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 
Wellesley  Club  of  Taunton, 

Miss  Florence  H.  Stone,  Secretary,  20  Cedar  St.,  Taunton,  Mass. 
Worcester  Wellesley  Club, 

Miss  Alice  A.  Burlingame,  Secretary,  17  Somerset  St.,  Worcester,  Mass. 


Academic  Year 

Administration 

Admission: — 
Requirements  for 
To  Advanced  Standing    . 
By  Certificate     . 
By  Examination 
To  Freshman  Class 
To  Department  of  Music 
To    Department   of    Physical 

Education 
Of  Special  Students 

Alumnae  Association,  Offi 

CERS  OF    . 

American  School  of  Classi 

cal  Studies  in  Athens 
American  School  of  Classi 

CAL  Studies  in  Rome 
Anglo-Saxon 
Archaeology 
Architecture    ... 

Art 

Art  Collections 
Astronomy  .... 
Bequest,  Forms  of  . 
Biblical     History,    Litera 

TURK,  and  Interpretation 
Billings  Hall  . 

Board    

Botany  .... 
Calendar  .... 
Certification,  Right  of 
Certificates  : — 

For  Admission 

For  Advanced  Standing  . 

In  Music    .... 

For  Special  Students 
Chemistry   .... 
Christian  Association    . 
College  Entrance  Examina 

tion  Board   . 
Committees  of  Trustees  : — 

Executive   .... 

Finance       .... 
Committees  of  Faculty 
Correspondence 
Courses  of  Instruction 
Dante  Prize 
Degrees:— 

B.A.,  Requirements  for  . 

M.A,,  Requirements  for  . 
Degrees  Conferred  in  1909 
Economics  .... 
Elocution    .... 
Education    .... 
English  Composition 
English  Language   . 
English  Literature 
Examinations  : — 

College        .... 

Entrance  .... 
Expenses  .... 
Faculty  .... 
Farnsworth  Art  Building 


INDEX 

s 

Fees 

142 

19 

Fellows 

7. 17 

Fellowships        .        .        .        . 

144 

26 

Foundation  and  Purpose 

23 

46 

French         

81 

44 

Geology        

86 

41 

German         

S8 

25 

Gothic 

125 

124 

Graduate  Instruction    . 

J  39 

Greek    

95 

103 

Gymnasium 

152 

47 

Harmony  and  Musical  The- 

ory   

119 

164 

Health  Provisions 

144 

Hebrew         .... 

54 

1 45 

History         .... 

98 

Hygiene        ... 

103 

145 

Italian         .... 

109 

80 

Laboratories     . 

153 

114 

Latin 

III 

48,49 

Libraries    .... 

151 

48 

Logic 

126 

152 

Marine  Biological  Labora 

52 

TORY  AT  Wood's  Holl 

.        146 

T?8 

Mathematics,  Applied    . 

"5 

Mathematics,  Pure 

1x6 

54 

Meteorology     . 

^86 

153 

Mineralogy 

141 

Music  : — 

57 

Theory  of    . 

.        119 

5 

Instrumental  and  Vocal  . 

123 

44 

Equipment  in     . 

•        153 

Music  Hall 

153 

45 

Needs  of  College     . 

.        157 

46 

Observatory 

124 

Pedagogy     .... 

68 

47 

Philology    .... 

•        '^1 

60 

Philosophy  .... 

126 

24 

Physics         .... 

.        131 

Physical  Education 

103 

41 

Physiology 

.        136 

Political  Science    . 

100 

7 

Psychology 

127 

7 

Residence    .... 

H3 

21 

Sanskrit       .... 

.          125 

2 

Scholarships      . 

144 

48 

With  Stipend:— 

no 

For  Graduates 

144 

For  Undergraduates      . 

;   ;g 

137 

Without  Stipend 

139 

Scientific  Collections  . 

153 

159 

Sociology    .... 

62 

62 

Spanish         .... 

133 

70 

Special  Students 

47 

68 

Studio  Lessons  . 

.    50.51 

-& 

Students'  Aid  Society     . 

Summary  of  Students     . 

163 

71 

Trustees,  Board  of 

6 

Tuition         .... 

141 

137 

Vacations    .... 

^^ 

41 

Wellesley  Clubs      . 

•       .'4 

141 

Zoological  Station  in  Napl 

es  : 146 

9 

Zoology        .... 

134 

152